Home

Cue

1. Go Hold Go Hold This chapter includes the following sections e Selecting cues e Timed faders and LED displays e Playback Cue List e Fader Status display e Selecting and playing cues e Go toa different cue e Controlling fades manually e Quickstep Selecting cues There are three ways to determine which cue from the Cue List will play back on stage next e You can select a cue manually e When a cue plays Impression 2 automatically selects the next cue e Impression 2 automatically selects linked cues You must be in Stage mode to select cues to play back but you can run the selected cue from either Stage or Blind by pressing Go When one cue is playing Impression 2 automatically selects the next cue on the Cue List to play next To play the next cue press the Go key under the fader in which you want the cue to be played If you are working in Stage mode you see the cue running on the monitor To select a cue other than the next on the Cue List press Cue and enter the cue number Then press Go to play the cue Cues that have been assigned a Follow time begin playing automatically once the cue before them on the Cue List finishes When you play a string of follow cues you only need to start the first cue Impression 2 user manual Timed faders and LED displays Impression 2 has two timed faders that allow you to play back
2. 71 Using Updatetoaddchannelstoacue 72 Using Update to modify fade rate 73 Deleting GUES mora toa nia a a e a eden 74 COPVINGICUES decana wees Set Bare er ENE ain ee rr 74 Inserting CUES Suenan a ae Ee ae ESO eee 75 CUE LIS ten cc 288 ee he ei Oh Gh eae 2 hor hh 2G ates sker A inet 76 Chapter 7 TEAK 5722952 paseo rhe als ty hls eh aad ener he ls edt 79 WACK RECOM kdu aaa stat add mde aa 80 Using record to create trackS 0 0 eee 81 Recording modified CUES cena ice be en bee a ee 82 ISSN CUE ss ek a haces SA Ue sate Be ea 84 Blackout cues and tracking 0020220 eee eee 86 TRACKSNES Be ser eos Ee dee Sor Oa RE Oe Der ae a 88 Chapter 8 Multipart Cues gt cic penn eon ete oP eek SPP Ra eee lO PRS ROR 91 Recording a multipart CUE ee 92 Converting a standard cue to a Multipartcue 93 Wait times in multipart cueS 0000 0002 eee 94 Editing a multipart cue 2 000 020 0 o 94 Deleting a part from a multipart cue 94 Adding deleting and modifying ChannelS 95 Modifying fade and wait times 96 Chapter 9 Playing back cues 00000 97 Selecting CUE e ked 98 Timed faders and LED displaysS 0 000 cece eee 99 SUS SLAS Bcc fre gns Dene Mette 21g tigers Det Ame ee teede Wk den et erg Se 100 Fader Status display io ad ia eg eta to eo 101 Selecting an
3. 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 6 25A SB GOA CN o o 00 NY MY ETCNet Remote Video Interface front panel ETCNet remote video interface PUSH H O O A 0000000 EE Off O Console Connection Impression 2 user manual appendix a installation Remote Video Interface settings The RVI Processor Board is the lower circuit board in the Remote Video Interface RVI It contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit Under normal conditions these switches will never need to be changed 12345678 00000000 OPEN DIP switches RVI Video Board 096 QUI RVI Processor Board If the settings get changed and you need to restore them find the switches at location S4 and adjust the settings as listed below The Remote Video Interface checks DIP switch settings when unit is turned on You must restart the unit for the new settings to take effect DIP Switch Position On Closed Off Open Off Open Off Open Off Open On Closed On Closed Off Open ONWNOOUORWN Function Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On Normal operation Factory Use On o NI FAR HUG R G REE SS SS Switches are either On Close
4. 5 Press Enterl or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel the opera From disk in progress Message tion remains until show is loaded chapter 15 diskette functions 179 180 Impression 2 user manual chapter 16 Printing Impression 2 supports parallel printers including some laser printers Printer installation is described on page 279 of Appendix A Installation This chapter includes instructions for using Impression 2 s print options Each of the following printouts is explained and illustrated on the following pages e Stage display e Cues e Groups e Submasters e Cue list e Group list e Submaster list e Macros e Patch e Channel attributes e Real Time Programs e SMPTE events e Tracksheet Printer options Before you begin printing verify that your printer is installed correctly and that it is turned on For instructions on installing printers see Appendix A Installation All print options are located on the Print Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 5 Print Functions and press Enter Impression 2 displays the Print Functions menu illustrated below Functions 00 AM Stage Display Cues Groups Submas ters Cue List Group List Submaster List Macros Patch DO N AWN m Channel Attributes Real Time Programs SMPTE Events Tracksheet pointer Printer i i i A A Printer Printer Return You may pause the current printing job or cancel i
5. Insert Step Insert Step is softkey S5 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S5 Insert Step to insert an empty step ahead of the selected or specified step Example S5 Insert Step Enter Enter places an empty step in front of the selected step Example S5 Insert Step 5 Enter Enter places an empty step in front of step 5 Internal Clock Internal Clock is softkey S1 in the SMPTE Events display Use S1 Internal Clock to set the SMPTE internal clock This clock serves as a backup for SMPTE input and will execute the SMPTE event list if the SMPTE input drops out The internal clock may also be used to run the SMPTE events without any SMPTE input The SMPTE time clock is displayed in green when SMPTE input is active It is displayed in red when the internal clock is active 324 Impression 2 user manual Jump to cue subroutine A subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Jump to cue step It then automatically starts another cue which is not included in the subrou tine You can jump to any type of cue regular subroutine or effect When you create the Jump to cue step enter the number of the cue to which to jump Keypad Numbers Use the keypad number keys to enter all numeric information dimmers channels cues times intensities etc Label Use Label to assign an alphanumeric label to a cue group or submaster Example Cue 6 L
6. Keystrokes i Press Stage or Blind If you press Stage press S7 More Softkeys Press S6 Delete in Stage Delete Cue in Blind Enter number of cue to delete This is optional if you wish to delete the cur rently selected cue To delete just the current cue press Enter To delete the current cue and any channels that track from that cue press Track Enter Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads To Delete cue press ENTER Delete cue and tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects cue to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes cue For more information on tracking see Chapter 7 Track page 79 Copying cues In some cases you may want to copy a cue s channel levels and use them as the foundation for a new cue To copy cue follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage or Blind Press Cue 1 If you are in Stage display press Go Press Record Press Cue 2 Press Enter Actions Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 2 Cue copy is complete Channel levels have been copied from cue 1 to cue 2 You can now modify the new cue Note You may also copy a look from a cue to a submaster or a group To do so
7. 5 If you wish to change the Prompt reads ETCLink address press Select ETCLink address 9 ETCLink Address Enter 6 Press 1 Enter ETCLink ETCLink address is changed address may be 1 or 2 Note If you change the ETCLink address you must cycle power to the console before the new address will take effect Enabling ETCLink messages If you wish ETCLink advisory messages to be displayed while you are operating the console you must enable them from the ETCLink Functions menu To enable advisories follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 6 Display Advi Prompt reads sories and press Enter Enable disable display of ETCLink advisories 1 Enable all 2 Enable fatal error advisories only 0 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter All ETCLink advisories are enabled Note To disable some or all advisories follow the same steps but select 0 or 2 in step 4 212 Impression 2 user manual Monitoring dimmers When used in conjunction with Sensor dimming equipment the Impres sion 2 allows you to monitor individual dimmer loads in your system This can greatly simplify troubleshooting by identifying such things as burned out lamps and incorrectly lamped or unplugged fixtures When dimmer monitoring is in use Sensor electronics constantly monitor dimmer loads If there is a
8. 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade Designates cue as a crossfade within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter intensity Impression 2 user manual chapter 13 subroutines 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press 5 5 Press 8 gt Press gt Press 2 O Press S1 Step 2 Enter Repeat steps 7 through 13 altering attributes as desired to add additional cues as subroutine steps Press S1 Step 6 Enter Press S2 Style to select a subroutine style You may need to press S7 More Softkeys first Styles are described on page 159 Press 3 Enter Press 8 Enter Complete entering all cue steps and style steps as described above Press Record enter cue number and press Enter to record subroutine cue Selects a level of 55 percent for the cue within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter upfade time Sets an upfade time of eight seconds Prompt reads Enter downfade time Sets a downfade time of eight seconds Prompt reads Enter follow time Sets a follow time of 20 seconds Step 1 is now complete Selects step 2 to edit Selects step 6 to edit Prompt reads Select style of subroutine command 1 Loop 2 Bounce 3 Jump to cue 4 Hold for go Selects Jump to cue style for step 6 Prompt reads Select cue number Selects cue 8 for Jump to cue When subroutine reaches step 6 the subroutine ends and runs cue 8
9. 155 BO 52 54 56 58 60 146 143 150 152 154 156 611163 65 67 11691171 157 159 163 165 1657 62 64 66 1168 170 172 15 160 164 166 165 73117651 17711791 151 1153 169 1141 1173 175 177 179 7411761 17811801 18211854 1791 172 YY 176 176 160 3511857 1891191 11931195 181 165 185 1987 109 86 GS 90 1192 94 96 182 154 186 155 190 41 42 Impression 2 user manual chapter 5 setting channel levels Setting channel levels is the first step in recording cues submasters and groups Setting channel levels in Stage mode brings light levels up on stage Setting channel levels in Blind mode does not affect stage lights This chapter includes the following sections Channel modes Channel attributes Selecting channels Setting channel levels Channel check About Channel Channel modes Channels may be in any of the following modes Each responds differently to commands Captured channels Captured channels are channels that you have selected and are live on stage They remain live until you press Rel to release them Captured channels override all other channel settings For example if a channel is in a fader at 100 percent and you capture it and set it to 50 percent Impression 2 sets the captured channel at 50 percent Press Rel twice to release captured channels Selected channels Selected channels are channels over which you have immediate keypad control You c
10. 2 Press Sub 2 3 Press Group 3 4 Set channel levels Or press Enter to impose only the group s propor tions on the currently set levels 5 Press Record 6 Press Enter to re record the modified submaster Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects group 3 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press clear Records submaster 2 with group 3 s channels added Submaster 2 now contains channels 1 through 10 at 75 percent in addi tion to whatever other channels are already part of it If any of the chan nels between 1 and 10 were already included their levels were modified to match those in the group The same procedure can be used to combine groups and cues Groups can also be used as elements in effects Anywhere you set channel levels you can use a group to select those channels and set their levels chapter 10 groups 119 Only Only allows you to select several groups and then adjust only the channels the groups have in common For example say you are working with moving lights Each fixture
11. Disable ETCLink to turn off dimmer monitoring Softkey then becomes Enable ETCLink Disable MIDI Disable MIDI is softkey S1 in the Options Settings display Use S1 Disable MIDI to disable either ETC MIDI or MIDI Show Control Both MIDI protocols may be enabled at the same time and are disabled individually appendix d reference 317 DMX512 Mode DMX512 Mode is softkey S2 in the Input Output Configuration display Use S2 DMX512 Mode to set a DMX512 port to multiplex mode or normal mode Multiplex mode allows dimmers to be used with ETC Source 4 multiplexers Switching from multiplex to normal mode will cause dimmers on that port to be taken out of the patch DMX512 Port DMX512 Port is softkey S1 in the Input Output Configuration display S1 DMX512 Port allows selection of a DMX512 output port to put into multiplex mode or to change the starting DMX512 number DMX512 starting numbers may not be changed by the user if any port is in multiplex mode Example S1 DMX512 Port 3 S2 DMX512 Mode Enter 1 Enter sets port 3 to multiplex mode DMX512 Speed DMX512 Speed is softkey S4 in the Input Output Configuration display S4 DMX512 Speed changes the DMX512 transmission rate to accom modate DMX512 receivers that accept data at different rates Four rates are available Max Fast Medium and Slow The DMX Speed should be set to Max when used with ETC DMX512 receivers Other equipment may require slo
12. Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup Menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 7 Clear Prompt reads Designer s Worksheet To clear Designer s Work Enter sheet press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Designer s Worksheet regions cleared Returns to Setup menu Macros Clear Macros erases all macro information from a show To erase all macros follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 8 Clear Macros Prompt reads Enter To clear macros press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Macros cleared Returns to Setup menu chapter 17 clear functions 197 Reset 1 to 1 Patch Reset Patch 1 to 1 resets your console s patch to a one to one patch Thus channel 1 is patched to dimmer 1 channel 2 is patched to dimmer 2 and so on This function is independent of your show It does not clear label level or profile settings See Chapter 5 Patch for more information about patch To clear all patch information including label level and profile settings press Setup 4 Enter and select Clear Show and Patch or press S1 Reset System To reset your patch follow these steps Keystrokes Action
13. Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump Prompt reads Enter submaster number Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump3 Records macro 4 leaves editing mode Macro runs 169 Playing macros As a macro runs the LED in the macro s key flashes Only one macro may run ata time To run macros 1 through 5 press the appropriate macro key For example to run macro 1 press M1 To play a macro recorded in M1 M5 follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press MH Action Selects Stage display mode Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the key strokes To run any other macro press MX the number of the macro and Enter For example to run macro 10 press M 1 0 Enter To play a macro without its own key follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press M and enter the macro number 3 Press Enter Canceling a macro Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the key strokes To cancel a running macro press any other macro key Powerup macro You may select a macro to run automatically each time you turn your con sole on To do so follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 6 Enter w 170 Press 1 0 Enter P
14. Profile Profile is softkey S7 in the Patch display Press S7 Profile to assign one of 10 profiles to a dimmer A dimmer may be assigned a proportional patch level or a profile Example Dim 6 57 Profile 4 Enter assigns profile 4 to dimmer 6 Purge Flexi Purge Flexi is softkey S1 in the System Settings display Press S1 Purge Flexi to recalculate the list of channels used in Flexi channel mode This also happens automatically when you load a show from disk or when you turn Flexichannel on Quickstep Enable Disable Quickstep is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the Stage and Fader displays S1 Quickstep allows you to run through a show checking all cues without having to wait for fades When Quickstep is active the faders ignore all upfade downfade and wait times Cues snap immediately to their completed levels when you press Go or Back Disable Quickstep mode by pressing S7 again or by leaving the Stage display Rack Status Rack Status is softkey S6 in the System Status and Dimmer Status displays Use S6 Rack Status to check information about your dimmer racks including rack type starting address port information voltage frequency and ambient temperature Random Random is softkey S6 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Use S6 Random to cause the step list execution to be selected and run randomly To cancel the Random attribute press S6 again Random Rate
15. Rather than assign elements to steps one at a time you can assign a range of elements to a range of steps on a one to one basis The console assigns elements channels or groups to each step in turn i e channel 1 to step 1 channel 2 to step 2 and so on If there are more elements than steps Impression 2 assigns an element to each step then returns to the first step and continues assigning elements one per step until all are assigned Follow these steps to create an effect that uses a one to one channel assignment In the example channels 1 through 22 are assigned to steps 1 through 10 creating a ten step effect Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display and Typel 3 designates it as an effect cue 2 Press S1 Step and enter Prompt reads 1 Thru 1110 Select step numbers 3 Press Enter Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press 1 Thru 2 2 the Prompt reads range of channels to Select channel numbers assign to the steps 5 Press Enter Channels are assigned to steps as indicated above see chart below Step number Contains channels Step 1 1 11 21 Step 2 2 12 22 Step 3 3 13 Step 4 4 14 Step 5 5 15 Step 6 6 16 Step 7 7 17 Step 8 8 18 Step 9 9 19 Step 10 10 20 147 Controlling effects Effect steps are controlled by assigned attributes fade times and rates In addition the cue or submaster containing the effect may be assigned fade
16. Unpark a group cue or submaster To unpark the channels in a group cue or submaster follow these steps pressing Group Cue or Sub respectively in step 2 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Group Prompt reads Group mode Select cue number to use as group then press AT to park or press Release to unpark 3 Enter the group numberto Unparks the group s channels unpark and press Rell chapter 22 park 265 Park display Press Park to bring up the Park display The Park display lists parked dim mers on the top half of the screen and parked channels on the lower half along with their parked levels Porked Channels 100 101 102 FL FL FL 113 114 Fl FL 125 FL The Park display can show up to 36 dimmers and 36 channels If you have more than 36 dimmers or channels parked use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to move through the Park display lists a page at a time You can also move directly to a channel or dimmer in the list by entering the channel number and pressing At or by pressing Dim entering the dimmer number and pressing At 266 Impression 2 user manual APPEndIX a installation This appendix includes instructions for installing your console and optional accessories Chapter 3 System settings and Chapter 4 Patch include instructions for entering the software settings you will probably update before you begin a new show Thi
17. press Dim to indicate that the next number entered will be a dimmer 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer 4 Press S7 Profile then use the keypad to enter the number of the desired profile Profile numbers are listed on menu at the top of the Patch screen Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer profile number Note To reset profile to a linear fade assign profile zero to the dimmer Dimmer profiles O Linear 1 IES square 2 Slow bottom 3 Fast bottom 4 Slow top 5 Fast top 6 Full at 1 7 Preheat 5 8 Preheat 10 9 Hot patch Dimmer intensity jumps from 0 to 100 at 1 output t Dimmer at 5 or 10 whenever console power is on Dimmer inten sity increases when output exceeds 5 or 10 Dimmer at full whenever console power is on 7 Affected by Blackout but not by Grandmaster 36 Capturing channels in Patch Impression 2 lets you select and capture channels without returning to Stage mode This allows you to bring channels up on stage to view the proportional settin
18. press S1 Independent Enable disable independent Use Thru And and channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Except to select multiple channels 4 Press 1 then press Channel is independent Enter Impression 2 user manual Flipped channels The Flip command inverts the output of the channel to which it is applied A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play but the level sent to the channel is inverted This is particularly useful for some moving light functions For example flip the output of the channel controlling the pan of one of two moving lights If you then record both lights pan control channels to a submaster the two lights movements mirror each other To mark a channel as flippea follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display Prompt reads Select channel number s 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel to flip and press S2 Flip Prompt reads Use Thru And and Enable disable flipped channel s Except to select multiple 1 Enable 0 Disable channels 4 Press 1 then press Channel is flipped Enter chapter 5 setting channel levels 48 Labeling a channel The Channel Attributes display
19. tion about the Sneak function see page 51 Default time is five seconds for a Sneak Follow these steps to set a new Sneak time Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 6 Default Sneak Time and press Enter 4 Enter the time you wish to assign as the Sneak time and press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter default sneak time Sets the new default Sneak time 19 20 Setting Designer s Worksheet options The Designer s Worksheet options display allows you to choose the template you wish to use and enable the sliders on either the con sole or the digitizer Note The Grandmaster fader and submaster sliders may only be enabled on the console or the digitizer not both For more information about the Designer s Worksheet see page 205 Follow these steps to set Designer s Worksheet options Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 7 Designer s Worksheet Setup and press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Select Designer s Worksheet setup then press ENTER The following display appears 01 44 PM 1 12x12 template with submast Enab led 2 12x12 template without submast 3 12x1 template without submast Current Sliders Enabled Console S 82 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 8 T
20. 01 Press Solol Press Record Group Press 3 Press Enter Press Solo Action Selects Stage display mode Sets channels 1 through 25 to full on stage Selects channels 5 through 20 All other channels remain unselected Prompt reads Select excepted channel number All channels other than those selected drop to zero Prompt reads To restore levels press SOLO Select channel numbers Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 3 Records selected channels into group 3 Restores full look to stage Hint Press Except Sub 1 in step 2 to deselect channels contributed by submaster 1 109 110 Displaying groups on stage To view a recorded group on stage follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Press Group 2 Press Full Adjust channel levels as desired Press Rel to release the group s chan nels Action Selects Stage display mode Selects group 2 Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Impression 2 user manual Working with groups in Blind chapter 10 groups There are two group modes in Blind Group mode and Group Editing mode In Group mode Impression 2 brings up the channels from a grou
21. 2 i 3 E 4 System Status 5 Dimmer Status 6 Select Rack 7 A 8 Return gt ETCLink SMPTE 3 1 Insert Event 2 Copy Event 3 Move Event 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Event 7 More Softkeys gt SMPTE 8 Sort Impression 2 user manual index A A 40 310 About 38 About Dimmer w ETCLink 39 Channel 53 Dimmer 38 Show 4 Accessories 201 Alphanumeric keyboard 210 Designer s Worksheet 205 ETCLink 211 Infrared Remote Focus Unit 203 Remote Focus Unit 202 SMPTE 241 Add channel 95 Allfade 56 310 315 Subroutine step 158 Alphanumeric keyboard 210 278 Installing 278 Keyboard type 278 Pinout 278 Alphanumeric keys 310 Alternate 310 And 310 Arrow keys 6 Asterisk 10 11 12 At 310 Attributes 310 Channel Attributes display 45 B B 40 311 Back 103 311 Back panel 268 Backup looks 219 Playing 224 Recording 223 Blackout 259 311 Blackout cue 86 Blackout key Disable 21 Enable 21 Blind 61 Cue List 76 Display 8 311 Multipart cues 94 Record cue 62 Boldface 3 Bounce effect 311 Bounce subroutine 159 311 Brackets 3 Build 311 Bump SMPTE 312 Bump buttons 128 Bump buttons enable disable 25 Bump Status 312 C Calibrate 312 Cancel 312 Captured channels 36 44 312 CD80 41 Changing pages 6 Channel 312 Capture all active 50 Captured 44 Captured in Patch 36 Channel Attributes display 45 Channel Check 52 Channel levels 43 Color 6 Flash 50 320 Flipped 47 Full 50
22. 3 Attach the pen holder to the upper left or right hand corner of the Worksheet by removing the protective paper from the base and pressing the adhesive to the tablet 4 Place one printed template sheet under the clear plastic flap on the digitizer 5 Set the voltage selection switch to match your electrical outlet In the US set the voltage switch to 110 6 Plug the power cord into the back of the Worksheet and into an elec trical outlet or a surge protecting power strip Note Additional pads of Designer s Worksheet templates are available from your dealer or ETC 7 Set the three sets of DIP switches on the Worksheet as indicated in the chart below 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 seta Down Down Down Down Ue Up Up UP seca Down Up Down Up Down Down Up UP setc Up Up Down Down Down Down Up Down 8 Turn the Worksheet power on by pressing the on off switch The LED labeled Indicator on the back panel is lit when power is on If the LED blinks four times after you turn the power on the interface cable is not connected correctly 9 Press Setupl and select 1 System Settings 282 Impression 2 user manual appendix a installation 10 Press 7 Designer s Worksheet Setup Enter Impression 2 dis plays the Designer s Worksheet Setup Menu 12x12 template with submas t 2 2x12 template without submast 3 12x17 template without submast Current Sliders Enabled Console 1 By s2 NE S4 s5 S6 S
23. Blue video Ground Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground not connected 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected 13 H H V syne 14 V sync 15 not connected O 0 YO 0140N Note In some installations you may need additional grounding An addi tional grounding location is provided on the rear of the console for this pur pose This console is not certified for use in wet locations 272 Impression 2 user manual Older console DIP switch settings appendix a installation A set of DIP switches are located inside older consoles with keyswitch style power switches at the back right corner of the circuit board to the left of a strip of eight LEDs The settings of DIP switches 2 and 3 deter mine whether your system is using ETCNet DIP switch 4 enables SMPTE To change the DIP switch settings raise the top panel and hold it in upright position Find the switches and adjust the settings as shown on the list below Impression 2 checks DIP switch settings when the console is turned on You must restart the console for new DIP switch settings to take effect Switches are either On Closed or Off Open DIP switches 1 5 6 7 and 8 should always be Off DIP Switch Function 1 Factory Use Only Off Open Should always be set 2 3 Console mode on start up Off Off Network off On On Network on 4 SMPTE Off Open SMPTE disabled On Closed SMPTE enabled 5through8 Factory Use Only Off Open Should always be set
24. It also indicates the per centage of the console s available memory used for each function Press About Enter to display the About Show window Note There is not enough memory to record the maximum number of all functions at the same time Use About Show to monitor your memory usage as the complexity of your show increases If you fill the available memory you can reclaim it by clearing cues groups subs macros or events that you are no longer using About Show The Garden Plot 108 1024 The Memory left indicator shows you how much console memory is still available to record additional functions Impression 2 allows you to record up to 600 cues 500 groups 2 000 macros and 3 000 SMPTE events as avallable memory permits Note The console software uses approximately 15 20 percent of the available memory to store setup options and other console information shown above as System setup Impression 2 user manual chapter 2 Monitor displays Impression 2 provides a color video monitor This display provides infor mation regarding your show including a cue list the current status of the console s two fader pairs and a variety of user selectable displays These displays allow you to create and run shows and to configure your console and your lighting system If your system includes an ETCNet network additional monitors may be installed at other locations such as backstage or in the sound booth These remote
25. Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Soft Reveals second set of Stage softkeys keys 3 Press Record Cue 8 Selects cue 8 to record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press S8 DMX In 5 Press Enter Records only current DMX In levels into cue 8 DMX In starting channel chapter 20 control interfaces In order to enable DMX In you must set the DMX In starting channel The starting channel is the channel to which the first DMX In channel level will be assigned DMX512 levels from another source pile onto the levels set by your con sole In other words a channel set to two different levels goes to the higher of the levels For this reason it usually makes sense to assign the incoming levels to a range of channels that are not being actively used by your console For example say you are using channels 1 through 200 in your show You then use DMX In to bring in ten DMX512 levels from another console If you set your DMX In starting channel as channel 201 the DMX In levels control channels 201 through 210 239 Enabling DMX In SMPTE Input DAPNADN ETC MIDI Channel MIDI Show Control Device IDs DMX In Starting Channel 257 Infrared Remote 01 06 PM Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled SMPTE Fromes Per Second 30 Disploy Cue Lis Dimmer Monitoring SMPTE List Cue List Disabled To
26. or S4 Pause Mode to interrupt SMPTE code when you are programming the console This prevents SMPTE events from running while you are working 256 Impression 2 user manual Remote macros chapter 20 control interfaces The Remote macro feature provides the ability to access up to 8 macros from locations up to 1000 feet from the main console Typically the Remote Macro control device is an eight button control station The remote macro outputs control macros 1 901 through 1 908 To run one of these macros from a remote location press the appropriate con trol ETC does not provide remote macro units However the console does provide a 25 pin connector labeled Remote Go to which you may attach a user supplied remote macro control device See Installing remote macros on page 298 for more information about installing remote macros Note The Impression 2 Lighting Playback Controller provides four Remote Macro connectors for a total of 32 remote macros These are each equivalent to the single connector described above These remote macro outputs control macros 1 901 through 1 932 257 chapter 22 park This chapter includes instructions for using Impression 2 s Park function Park allows you to set channels or dimmers at a level and maintain those lights at that level on stage regardless of other instructions Parked chan nel and dimmer levels are not affected by any other instructions and will not be recorded into cues
27. press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer To print a partial list of cues from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press 2 Print Cues Enter Use the keypad to enter the first cue in the range you wish to print Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the last cue in the range you wish to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1st cue number to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print cue or select last cue number to print File sent to the printer 183 Groups Print Groups prints a list of groups recorded in the currently loaded show Groups are listed by number Information provided includes the group s label and the levels of all channels included in each group To print a full list of groups follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup Menu 2 Press 5 PrintFunctions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 3 Print Groups Prompt reads Enter Press ENTER to print all groups or select 1st group number to print 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation To print a partial group printout from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press 3 Print Groups Prompt reads Enter Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1s
28. purchase information please contact your local dealer or ETC 202 Remote Focus Unit RFU The Remote Focus Unit RFU is a small portable control panel you can use from a remote location such as in the house on your studio set or from backstage You can use an RFU with or without a remote monitor 2 Cue Chan Stage 1 1 5at75 M1 Stage Blind 7 8 9 Chan Dim A B Clear NH S 4 5 6 Thru At A B Back Sub Group 1 2 3 And Full A B 2 Ex 5 AH Time Cue 0 cept Level as Track Rec Clear Enter Rel Solo Remote Focus Unit O Keypad The keys on the RFU s keypad function exactly like their counterparts on the console O Fader window The top line displays the next cue on the cue list The bottom line displays the cue in the A B fader on the left and the cue in the C D fader on the right Cue channel number window Displays the currently selected cue group or submaster Keypad prompt window Displays the same prompt that appears in the upper right corner of the Stage or Blind display 8 Power switch Power switch is on in the up position and off in the down position For RFU installation instructions see Appendix A Installation REU must be turned Off before you install it For instruction on installing
29. record a show from memory to a diskette follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Inserta formatted diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions menu Enter 4 Press 1 Write Show to The following screen appears Disk Enter 5 Press Enter or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel the To disk in progress Message operation remains until show is recorded 178 Impression 2 user manual Reading a show from diskette When you read a show and system settings from a diskette and load it into memory the new show completely overwrites the current show including channel and dimmer counts and default times and level There fore if you want to keep the current show follow the instructions on page 178 to record current show before you read a new show from diskette If your Designer s Worksheet setup is different in the new show a mes sage will warn you Fades being executed are interrupted during the read operation fades resume when read is complete To read all information from diskette into memory follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Insert diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions menu Enter 4 Press 2 Read Show The following screen appears Show from Disk Enter information is displayed including show name date recorded etc
30. removes the cue from the fader immediately unless you have reset the default fader clear time For instructions on changing fader clear time see Setting default fader clear time on page 18 chapter 9 playing back cues 99 Cue List The Cue List provides a list of cues for the show including all of the cues programmed attributes In addition the display provides information about which cue is active or running and on which fader the cue is running The Cue List will display the playing cue or the last cue played and then the pending cue The pending cue is highlighted in white Cue indicators The color in which a cue is displayed provides information about the cue s current status Gray co Cue is not selected and is not in a fader White Pending cue will play back next time either Go button is pressed Yellow Cue is in a fader and is selected in Stage Gold Cue is in a fader but is not selected in Stage Light red Cue is currently running and is selected in Stage Dark red Cue is currently running but is not selected in Stage SA Cue is selected in Stage or Blind Impression 2 user manual Fader Status display chapter 9 playing back cues The fader status display consists of two windows at the bottom of the dis play It provides information about the cues loaded to the console s fad ers including fade times and rates The left window monitors
31. the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine the size of the load To correct the problem use Check Loads to determine the size of the load change The load on dimmer has changed from W to W A decreased load indicates lamp failure An increased load indicates that a lamp has been added since the last Record Load Correct the problem or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load DC output has been detected on dimmer If this condition persists it may harm the connected load Please check the connected load An SCR has failed On Off in dimmer ff The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed on The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer ff output has failed off Either the circuit breaker has tripped or the dimmer needs to be replaced Dimmer s load has failed The most likely cause is a lamp failure Either replace the lamp or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load Data error on Rack DMX port A B Please check DMX cabling and connections between the console and the rack Rack ambient temperature is high at degrees F The temperature does not yet exceed acceptable operational limits but the rack should be checked Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is low at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is outside the acceptable operating
32. 000 00 cee 5 lA DNs eee Mm is eae Qe seg Pith D andaga 6 CHANGING PAE A Wome Rs 6 SIJES a ee oe ee Goes ee eee te o E e Se aes 7 Bind rad SE A 6 ene ok 8 RA AA e Seals ohn RSE Se oo ott NS hus 8 se nds led 9 Flexichannel ieres terreri Oe bak coed Oven Oe AG Gree a ae eens 10 Updating Flexichannel 0 0 0 0 eee 10 Tracksneetic A Ph ie a ag heeded de Phen ORE TS 11 Pate ura Cary O ALC ad A A A ar AN 12 Pana a a dice 13 Chapter 3 System settings ii EA Pale A 4 EL 15 Setting number O AIM Se a ash aw deen 16 Setting number of channels 0 0 00 00000 16 Setting default fade times 1 2 eee 17 Setting detault Level si tern anos ts okie athe de slds de 18 Setting default fader clear time 18 Setting default Sneak time 0 0 00 0 aaan naana araa 19 Setting Designer s Worksheet options 20 Enable disable Blackout key 000002 o 21 Enable disable Flexichannel 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee 22 Updating Flexichannel 0 0 0 00 ccc eee 22 Set Master type ica a ate beh BE hone oh 23 Set Channels Submasters 1 t0 1 00 0 0 00 000 cee ee 23 Setting time format occ heehee Rok eed Ge hee Bee lees lee 24 Record OCKO Uta a A see E 24 Enable disable Bump keys 000000 02 o 25 Srl AAA A E E 26 Naming SHOW id a a la se leerte uden eses 27 Chapter 4 PAE A A cd e 29 Selecting one to one patch eee 30 Creating custom pateh seh ch cree
33. 1 to 1 Channel Attributes Real Time Programs SMPTE Events Impression 2 user manual Show Clear Show erases all information associated with a specific show from your console s memory This does not include patch information or system configuration information To erase a full show follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 1 Clear Show Prompt reads Enter To clear show data press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Show cleared Returns to Stage display mode Cues Clear Cues erases all recorded cues from a show To erase all cues follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 2 Clear Cues Prompt reads Enter To clear cues press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Cues cleared Returns to Setup menu Groups chapter 17 clear functions Clear Groups erases all recorded groups from a show To erase all groups follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 3 Clear Groups Prompt read
34. 273 Connecting dimmers These instructions explain how to connect DMX512 outputs and provide DMX512 connector pinout specifications The Impression 2 console pro vides two DMX512 output ports for a total capacity of 1 024 outputs Follow these steps to connect dimmers to your console 1 Verify that your dimmer connector pinout matches the pinout listed below If your pinout does not match contact your dealer or ETC Caution Your dimmer control common must be compatible with con sole control common they must elther be the same level or the dimmer control common must float Verify compatibility with your dealer if you are not sure 2 Connectup to two DMX512 cables 1 024 outputs to DMX512 output connectors on back panel of console Output connector location is shown on page 268 DMX512 connector XLR 5 pin female 512 digital multiplex dimmers DMX512 pinout Common Data Data not connected not connected aRWN Replacing the auxiliary fuse If external devices the RFU or remote macros fail to operate correctly and you suspect the console fuse might be the problem follow these steps to replace the fuse 1 Turn off the console 2 Remove the power cord 3 Using a small flat head screwdriver genly press and rotate counter clockwise the fuse holder labeled RFU Remote I O 4 Replace the fuse with a fuse of rating T2 5A Do not use a fuse with any other rating This is a 2 5 amp 250 V time lag type f
35. 3 Press S6 Delete Macro Prompt reads To delete macro s select macro number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Enter macro or range of Corner reads macros you want to clear Macro 7 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter to clear the Clears macro 7 macro or Clear to cancel the action DA 172 Copying macros You may want to copy a macro or use macros as building blocks for new macros To copy contents of one macro to another follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 8 Macro Editing and press Enter Press S7 More Soft keys S5 Copy Macro Press 2 Press Enter Press 2 5 the number of the new macro Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects Macro display mode Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER Prompt reads To copy macro s select macro number s to copy and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the number of the macro you wish to copy Corner reads Macro 2 Prompt reads To copy selected macro s select target macro and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Macro 25 Macro copy is complete The contents of macro 2 have been copied into macro 25 Note In step 4 you may use And and Thru to enter multiple macros to copy If you do the new macros will be numbered consecutively starting with the macro you enter in
36. 3 Use the alphanumeric key board to type the desired label For example call cue 12 Toad exits 4 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects Cue 12 Prompt reads Type cue label F6 clear to end F7 last cue label F8 next cue label Enters cue label Corner reads Label Toad exits Records Cue 12 with label Toad exits Note If the cue did not previously exist press Record Enter in step 4 This will create the cue and label it as indicated all in one step 69 70 Modifying a recorded cue live All the preceding examples have involved creating a new cue In Stage if you want to add remove or modify channel levels you must play back the cue make your changes then re record the cue If you are changing cue attributes you do not need to play back the cue Modifying channels in a cue If you are not familiar with procedures for playing back cues see Chapter 9 Playing back cues Follow these steps to modify cues in Stage mode Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Cue enter cue number and press Go 3 Select channels and set channel levels to make the desired changes to the cue 4 Press Record Enter Or Press Record 8 Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue Modifies cue channel levels Re records cue with desired modifications Or Records the modified cue as cue 8 Note If you re record as the same cue mo
37. 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 4 Note that Impression 2 enters a level of 00 percent for channel 4 in cue 2 This fades channel 4 out when cue 2 is played Impression 2 user manual When you insert a cue with Track new channels track through the cues after it until Impression 2 encounters a cue with a level previously recorded for that channel Pressing Track rather than Record as in the previous example then 111111 Enter to insert and record the same cue 1 1 as above produces the results illustrated in Figure 5 Compare it to the results illustrated in Figure 4 in which the same cue was inserted using Record rather than Track Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 50 Cue 3 50 FF FF 50 Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 5 chapter 7 track Channel 4 creates a track from the cue after 1 1 until a pre recorded level interrupts it 85 86 Blackout cues and tracking Sometimes you may add a channel to a sequence of cues that has not used that channel yet For example you May want to add a channel to all cues in a scene To do this add the channel to the first cue in the sequence and use Track to track the change through the remaining cues However the last cue in sequence may be a blackout cue When you track the channel the new channel tracks until it runs into a different recorded level To ensure that channels are not tracked through a bl
38. CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to move Prompt reads To move selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new program starting at 5 00 PM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time Impression 2 user manual DMX512 input The DMX In feature allows you to combine console output with output from a second source of DMX512 for example a moving lights console DMX512 input from the secondary source is routed through the main con sole and combined with the main DMX512 output signal In this scenario the secondary DMX512 source maintains nominal control of its own levels but a predetermined submaster on the main console has proportional control On Impression 2 this proportional control is assigned to submaster 24 The submaster does not control independent channels Note While DMX In is enabled submaster 24 s normal recorded function is disabled When DMX In is disabled the submaster s normal function is restored DMX In Fader display The Fader display s DMX In display option allows you to view the DMX In levels that are currently live on Stage Press Fader 4 to select the DMX In Fader display DMX In softkey The DMX In softkey appears on the Stage and Fader displays Use the softkey to record only the DMX512 input levels into a cue group or sub For example to record current DMX512 input into a cue follow these steps
39. Cue 5 Except Sub 3 Enter records the current look in cue 5 except for the channels included in submaster 3 Example Channel 1 Thru 9 Except 5 At 5 sets channels 1 through 4 and 6 through 9 at 50 percent Fader The Fader display allows review and modification of channels in the A B and C D faders without affecting other channel levels Fader status display The fader status display consists of two windows at the bottom of the playback monitor It provides information about the cues loaded to Impression 2 s faders including fade times and rates The left window monitors the A B fader the right window monitors the C D fader The dis play counts down wait times for cues and indicates which step is running when an effect is active The illustration below shows the fader status display Cue Dw Hold EF Step 6 Flash Flash is softkey S8 in the Stage display S8 Flash sets the selected channel s level to 100 percent if the channel is currently at a level at or below 50 percent If the channel s level is above 50 percent Flash sets it to zero Levels set by Flash are only maintained while the key is pressed For example press Channel 5 then press and hold S8 Flash to set channel 5 to either 100 or zero Use and to advance the channel while Flash is pressed Example 4 S8 Flash flashes channel 4 320 Impression 2 user manual Flexichannel Impression 2 s Command display
40. Default settings will determine all other attributes of the cue You can change most default settings from the System Settings menu See Chapter 3 Entering system settings for information about setting and changing defaults Follow these steps to record cue 1 Keystrokes 1 Press Stage Press 1 Thru 1 0 Press At Press 5 0 5 Press Record 6 Press 1 Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Select channel numbers Selects channels 1 through 10 Prompt reads Enter intensity Sets a level of 50 percent for channels 1 through 10 Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects cue 1 Note The keypad defaults to cue mode when you press Record 7 Press Enter 8 Press Rell Records cue 1 containing channels 1 through 10 at 50 percent Releases captured channels Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Working with cues in Blind mode Blind mode allows you to create preview or modify cues without affect ing the current should work in look on stage If you prefer to work with live looks you Stage mode When you press Blind Impression 2 displays the following screen Grandmaster 100 051 52 53 54 55 076 77 101 02 03 04 05 Up 1 87 Cue Type Time 5 2XF 5 6 07 08 09 35 036 37 9 40 2 43 44 45 046 47 48 49 50 061 62 95 096 97 98 99 106 07 08 Wait Link Follow Rate Dn Up 0 5 8
41. Hold a second time to cancel playback of the cue in the fader leaving it in the fader where it stopped or press Go to resume the fade Impression 2 user manual Back Each fader has its own Back key Press Back to replay the cue most recently played on that fader Press Back again to play the cue before it on the Cue List and so forth moving backward through the Cue List Cues play back using the fade and wait times recorded with the cue Note The cue following the cue replayed by Back becomes the first cue in the Cue List If you then press Go that cue plays Note Back ignores cue links This example demonstrates the use of the Go Hold and Back keys Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Cue 2 3 Press Go 4 While cue is running press Hold S Press Go Once cue finishes press Back Go to a different cue To play back a cue other than the cue highlighted on the Cue List follow chapter 9 playing back cues these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Cue 2 3 Press Go Action Selects Stage mode display Selects Cue 2 Runs cue 2 Running cue pauses Cue resumes Previous cue fades up on stage Action Selects Stage mode display Selects cue 2 Runs cue 2 103 Controlling fades manually Impression 2 provides two ways to take manual control of cue playback manual override and rate override Manual override Manual override allow
42. Independent Allows a channel to be unaffected by Grandmaster Flash Release Solo and Blackout Release requires an extra keypress Flip Allows a channel s output to be reversed A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Label Allows you to assign labels to channels Chon Ind obe an Ind Flip Label y SR Pan y SR Tilt y SL Pan y SL Tilt y Stadium Wash To go to the Channel Attributes display follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attribute display chapter 5 setting channel levels 45 46 Independent channels An independent channel is not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash Otherwise independent channels function normally Use S1 Independent to make a channel independent Press Rel three times to release all independent channels Channels that control movement of moving lights or color scrollers will often be set as Independent This assures that in the case of a blackout or change in the Grandmaster setting the position of the moving light or color scroller will not change To mark a channel as independent follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1111 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display Prompt reads Select channel number s 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel to be independent and Prompt reads
43. Random Rate is softkey S7 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Press S7 Random Rate to cause the rate to be randomly selected and applied to each step The selection will be within the range defined for Low random rate and High random rate Rates may range from 0 to 2 000 To cancel the Random Rate attribute press S7 Clear Example S7 Random Rate 5 0 S7 Random Rate 2 0 0 to set the minimum rate to 50 percent and the maximum rate to 200 percent Rate fader Press the fader s Rate key to allow the fader rate to be controlled by the rate wheel Example A B Rate Rate Wheel adjusts the rate of the fade in fader A B Impression 2 user manual Rate Rate is softkey S3 in the Stage Blind Fader and List displays Use S3 Rate to edit the rate for a cue submaster multipart cue effect or subroutine Also use S3 Rate to place the timing for a submaster under rate wheel control Example S3 Rate Sub Bump 3 followed by adjustment of the rate wheel modifies submaster 3 s fade times Rate SMPTE Rate is softkey S4 after S7 More Softkeys in the Dimmer Status display Use S4 Rate to access the rate fields in the SMPTE Events display Press once to select the A B cue rate Press again to select the C D cue rate and press once more to select the submaster rate Rate Wheel Use the wheel when one of the fader Rate keys is active to alter the rate of fades Example Press AB Ra
44. S6 in the ETCLink Functions display Use S6 Unset Dimmer to return a dimmer or group of dimmers to normal dimming This requires a system connected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system Up Arrow Use T to move through various displays such as Stage Blind effects and macro mode Up Down Follow Up Down Follow is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Use S8 Up Down Follow to assign upfade and downfade times and to specify amount of time to hold before beginning the next subroutine step Example Step 1 S8 Up Down Follow 2 S8 Up Down Follow 4 S8 Up Down Follow 5 Enter assigns an upfade time of two sec onds and a downfade time of four seconds to step 1 Step 2 will start five seconds after step 1 starts Update Update is softkey S2 in the Stage and Fader displays Press S2 Update to re record active submasters cues and groups as a selective record Modified levels are recorded into the source and control is simultaneously returned Example S2 Update Sub 1 Enter records submaster 1 with any modified channels originally controlled by submaster 1 Channel control is restored to submaster 1 Wait Use Wait to hold the start of the upfade or downfade to accomplish lag lead type cues The first wait will hold the upfade the second will hold the downfade The wait time 0 to 99 59 will begin counting when the cue is activated Example Cue
45. a remote monitor see Installing remote video monitors on page 296 To operate your installed RFU move power switch to On The console keypad and RFU are able to operate simultaneously Changes made from both console and RFU are displayed immediately on both con sole monitor and RFU You can control most console functions with RFU you cannot control sub masters however Warning Do not connect or disconnect the RFU when it is turned on Impression 2 user manual Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU The Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU allows you to control the Impres sion 2 console from distances up to 50 meters With it you can play back cues and macros and access dimmers channels groups and cues The IRFU can also be wired to the Main control console To enable the IRFU in Impression 2 ETC must modify the console at the factory and setup options must be adjusted See Installing Infrared Remote Focus Unit on page 297 for more information chapter 18 accessories 0 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc On Tx M1 M2 M3 M4 M Go Back Rec Clear Enter 7 8 9 Chan Cue 4 5 6 And Group 1 2 3 Thru At 0 Full Rel On Infra Red Auto Off E E Connector Macro controls Fader controls Other controls 203 204 Macro controls The five macro keys allow you to access macros M1 M2 M3 and M4 allow you to access macros 1 951
46. ara 51 Channel Chetki oh ee ted Rees DM hv eh Hoe AEM e dota 52 PD OUT scares eis LS bE eared REN part Ten RD Mote RR SE eal bas ds 53 About CAM eliana ee aay Bete 53 Chapter 6 CUCS nsenga Ass IN AE EM 55 WUC TY DOS sine bea hae TA EAA don ELEG 56 EOS a Sens Soe ER AEE ae SP ti EN NS Oe oes Shi DS 56 Aladino ls Ale 56 SUDOUTINGt lt 4 eun ds ee Bear ee See ke Soe 56 EFFECTSE a as Cette tae nah Sri ds een thee rod Merete 56 RECOrdTUNCHONS hs chee eee ra aca 57 CEAN CUES mails da elt a hdd Qed 58 VIEWING CUES is go bre ate nig eg ro See Vee ga wees Oe ead Bete 58 Working with cues in Stage mode 0 00 eee eee 59 Recording a cue in Stage aeo nr A EEEE eee 60 Working with cues in Blind mode 61 Recording a cue in Blind seen eee 62 Impression 2 user manual Recording a cue with a single fade time 63 Recording a cue with split fade times 64 Recording a cue with a wait time o o oo ooooooooo o 65 Recording cues with Link and Follow 66 Combining Link and Follow to create playback loops 67 Using Link to link a macrotoacue 67 Recording a cue using SO 0O o ooo oooooooooo es 68 Labeling cubra ap 69 Modifying a recorded cue live eee 70 Modifying channels ina cue 0 00 eee 70 Modifying cue attributes 02 eee 70 Using Update to modify channels ina cue
47. are allowed to reach Default High level is Full default Low level is zero Note If you create an effect step that includes groups its high and low values are proportional levels Impression 2 user manual Creating steps chapter 12 effects Create an effect by selecting the effect type for a cue or submaster then creating a series of steps in the Effect display Use the arrow keys to move around the Effect display and enter settings When you create a new step it takes the previous step s attributes as its defaults You may then edit the new step To edit a step attribute use the arrow keys to select the field of the attribute you wish to edit Use the keypad to enter the new setting for that attribute Then either press Enter to confirm the change without leaving the attribute field or press any arrow key to make the change and move to a different attribute field You can also use softkeys to move from field to field Follow these instructions to create a series of steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Cue or Sub 1 Press Type Press 3 If you are creating an effect submaster press S7 More Softkeys Press S1 Step and enter the number of the step to edit Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the channels or groups you want to include in the step then press gt Use the keypad to enter step time range is 0 to 9 59 minutes then press gt Action Selects the Blind
48. complete Actions Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Corner reads Sub 1 Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Sub 9 Contents of submaster 1 are copied to submaster 9 Note You may also copy a look from a submaster to a cue or a group To do so press Cue or Group in place of Sub in step 4 Impression 2 user manual Loading cues or groups to submasters Load Sub allows you to load the contents of one or more recorded groups or cues into submasters To load a look from a range of cues or groups to submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Load Sub Prompt reads Select submaster s to load To cancel press CLEAR 2 Press 9 Thru 1112 Selects submasters 9 through 12 Corner reads Sub 12 3 Press Cue or Group Prompt reads Select cue s to load into submaster s To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 And 3 Thru Selects cues 1 3 4 and 5 to copy to 5 submasters 9 through 12 Corner reads Cue 5 5 Press Enter Submaster Contents of cues 1 3 4 and 5 are copy is complete copied to submasters 9 10 11 and 12 respectively Copying cues or groups to submasters To copy a look from a cue or a group to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Cue
49. confirm that the new software has been successfully installed The current software version is displayed in the lower right corner of the display This version number should match the number on the diskette If it does not repeat the procedure 6 Press 4 Enter S1 Reset System The update is complete Software installation note In ETCNet networked systems where an Impression 2 console is con nected to Remote Interfaces and or Remote Video Interfaces both the console and the remote device must have the same version software installed For instructions for upgrading remote device software see Installing remote unit software on page 295 If you have any questions or experience difficulties while upgrading please call ETC s Technical Services department at 800 775 4382 277 Installing an alphanumeric keyboard Use the optional keyboard to assign alphanumeric names to cues sub masters groups effects and shows If you wish to use your own keyboard rather than order one with the con sole you can use any standard PC AT compatible alphanumeric keyboard If the keyboard you use is switchable use it only in its AT compatible mode ETC recommends the Cherry G80 1800 and Keytronic 101 key boards Although you may use keyboards from other manufacturers ETC does not guarantee compatibility Caution Do not connect or disconnect an alphanumeric keyboard while your system is turned on Doing so may cause the keyboard to initial
50. contains the following sections e Steps e Cue steps e Style steps e Creating a subroutine e Editing a subroutine e Deleting a step e Inserting a step Steps All subroutine steps are either cue steps or style steps A cue step con tains an existing recorded cue The subroutine lets you change levels and fade rates for the cue step without changing the original cues A cue step may contain an effect cue Astyle step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback pattern This allows you to run loops run bounces pause the subroutine until you press go or end the subroutine and jump to any other cue The following display shows a subroutine that runs a series of cues in a loop The next two pages describe the types of cue and style steps that are available Cue steps There are two types of cue step crossfade and allfade Crossfade In a crossfade step all increasing levels fade in the upfade time all decreasing levels fade in the downfade time Allfade In an allfade step all channels in both faders fade to a level that you choose and assign to the step 158 Impression 2 user manual Style steps The following playback styles are available for subroutines A style is assigned to a step When the subroutine runs the steps play back in numeric order until the subroutine reaches a style step The style step then determines whether the subroutine will loop bounce hold or end and run a different
51. cue The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Loop step It then returns to the first step and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Loop step enter the number of times you want the loop to return to the top of the step list If you enter 5 the sequence will play six times Enter 0 to create a continuous loop Bounce The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Bounce step It then runs back through the steps in reverse order and repeats the sequence for the num ber of times you specify When you create the Bounce step enter the number of times you want the subroutine to bounce One bounce equals running through the sequence for ward once and reverse once Enter 0 fora continuous bounce Jump to The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a cue Jump to cue step It then automatically starts another cue which is not included in the subroutine You can jump to any type of cue regular subroutine or effect When you create the Jump to cue step enter the number of the cue to which to jump Hold for The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Go Hold for Go step It then pauses until you press Go Subroutine attributes The following attributes may be applied to each cue step Sets an intensity level for the cue within the subrou tine The level proportionally affects the channel lev els assigned to the original cue Levels must be entere
52. digitizer Note Additional pads of Designer s Worksheet templates are available from your dealer or ETC 280 Impression 2 user manual appendix a installation 9 Press Setup and select 1 System Settings 10 Press 7 Designer s Worksheet Setup Enter Impression 2 dis plays the Designer s Worksheet Setup Menu 01 44 PM 12x12 template with submast Enob led 2 12x12 template without submast 3 12x17 template without submast Current Sliders Enabled Console Ss S2 3 84 s5 S6 8 8 Sheet Sliders Return 11 Select one of the displayed options either on the console keypad or by selecting F2 F3 or F4 on the Worksheet template button bar then press Enter 12 Press S1 Sheet Console Sliders to enable slider control from either the digitizer or the console 13 Touch the pen to the digitizer region labeled Calibrate or F1 14 Follow the instructions on the screen that direct you to touch the pen to the regions labeled A B and C 281 Installing the Kurta IS ONE The Kurta IS ONE digitizer tablet was shipped with older Designer s Work sheet systems Follow these steps to install and configure your Kurta IS ONE Designer s Worksheet 1 Insert the 9 pin serial connector of the Designer s Worksheet cable into the console or Remote Interface connector labeled Digitizer 2 Insert the plug end of the pointing device pen or stylus in the IS ONE connector labeled Pen Cursor
53. dimmers are shown on the display at once along with error mes sages associated with each dimmer Press S5 Select Dimmer Enter to select a specific dimmer or use and to move through the list of dimmers a page at a time chapter 19 sensor dimming 221 222 Setting and unsetting dimmers lf your console is connected to an ETC Sensor dimming system by an ETCLink network you may use your console to set and unset dimmers at the dimmer rack Note For more information on setting dimmers see the Sensor CEM User Manual Setting a dimmer To set a dimmer or group of dimmers to a level at the dimmer rack ignor ing any DMX512 outputs follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 6 Press Setup Select 9 ETCLink Func tions and press Enter Press S7 Set Dimmer Enter the dimmers you wish to set and press Enter Enter the level at which to set the dimmers Enter in two digit form e g one percent 01 Press Enter Unsetting a dimmer To unset a dimmer or group of dimmers and return them to normal oper ation follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 9 ETCLink Func tions and press Enter Press S6 Unset Dim mer Enter the dimmers you wish to unset and press Enter Press 0 Enter to unset all set dimmers Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Prompt reads Select dimmer number s to s
54. do the new regions will be numbered consecutively starting with the region you enter in step 6 208 Impression 2 user manual Clearing regions chapter 18 accessories You must be in Designer s Worksheet Editing display mode to clear indi vidual regions To clear all regions you can use the Clear Designer s Work sheet option from the Clear Functions menu as described on page 197 Note Clearing regions does not affect the macro assigned to the region Clearing a region removes it from the digitizer and the Designer s Work sheet display and removes the macro assignment To clear regions follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 7 Designer s Selects Designer s Worksheet Editing Worksheet Editing and display mode press Enter 3 Press S6 Clear Region Prompt reads To clear region s select region number s and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR 4 Press 7 Selects region 7 to clear Corner reads Region 7 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR 6 Press Enter to clear the Clears region 7 from the Designer s region or Clear to cancel Worksheet layout removes the the action assignment of macro 7 to region 7 209 Alphanumeric keyboard Impression 2 supports a standard alphanumeric keyboard The keyboard allows you to assign names to cues dimmers submasters groups and shows See Installing an alohanumer
55. draw a picture of the stage and outline regions corresponding to various instruments or fixtures on stage or in a studio You might program each region to select the channels for that area of the stage You can then touch that region to select channels and then enter desired level Or you might program more abstract regions on the worksheet For example you might program several areas on the worksheet each repre senting a song in a band s play list 205 206 Programming regions Before you begin programming design your worksheet regions by draw ing them on the worksheet tablet provided Be certain that the tablet has been calibrated See Appendix A Installation for details on calibrating the tablet Place your drawing under the clear plastic cover sheet and you re ready to start To create new or edit existing regions and macros follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Turn Designer s Work sheet on 2 With the worksheet pen touch Setup 3 Select 7 Designer s Worksheet Editing and touch Enter Region Operation s Actions Selects Setup display Prompt reads Select region number or touch a previously defined region then touch ENTER Impression 2 displays the following screen R 1 Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 0 Enter Enter Stage Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter Enter Stage Bump24 Setup 1 Enter 1 0 Enter DWS Sliders Stage M6 Bump1 Mwait O Bump2 Mwait 0 Bump3 Mwai 3 4 Mwait 0 B h t O E 6 Mwa
56. drive 4 Turn the console back on The console will display the boot screen and the message Loading XX Wait until the loading process is complete and the Remote Unit Update Program Menu appears This menu displays the version number of the software currently being loaded the console address and a list of all remote devices connected to the network remote devices must be turned on to appear It also shows the unit s network address type and current software version If your network devices are turned on but don t appear on the display and your network uses twisted pair wiring press S6 Swap Twst Pair Devices should appear within ten seconds Updating software to all remote devices To update the software on all remote devices press S1 Update All Units Updating software on selected remote devices To update the software on multiple remote devices use the arrow keys to move through the list of devices When the device you want to update is highlighted press S8 Mark This Unit to select that device An M appears to the left of the device name indicating that this device has been selected for updating Repeat this procedure for each device you want to update then press S2 Update Marked to update the software in each of the marked devices Updating software on a single remote device To update the software on a single remote device use the arrow keys to select the device then press S3 Update Th
57. effect upfade time 3 Enter the upfade time Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time 4 Press Enter Enter Prompt reads Enter Select step numbers 150 Impression 2 user manual Change downfade only Follow these steps to change only the effect s downfade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time Time Time Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time 3 Enter the downfade time Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time 4 Press Enter Prompt reads Select step numbers Change dwell only Follow these steps to change only the effect s dwell time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 3 Enter the dwell time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 4 Press Enter Enter Prompt reads Select step numbers Reset Hold dwell time If the dwell time is set to Hold an effect submaster will continue to run until you press the bump button An effect cue will continue to run until you press either Go or Hold Hold To reset the dwell time to Hold follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 3 Press Clear Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 4 Press Enter Enter Dwell time set to Hold Prompt reads Select step nu
58. enable the console to accept DMX512 input follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setupl 2 Press 6 Enter 3 Press 3 Enterl 4 Enter the first channel to be controlled by DMX In and press Enter See DMX In starting channel on page 239 for more information 5 If submaster 24 s red LED is flashing move its slider to 10 then to zero lf its green LED is flashing move its slider to zero Action Selects Setup menu Selects Options Settings menu Prompt reads Select DMX512 In starting channel Enter 0 to disable Enables DMX In and selects desired starting channel The DMX In slider is set to control DMX In red and green LEDs both light Note On Insight 2 consoles the submaster sliders must be in Submaster Mode to enable DMX In Use the Sub Mode key to set the sliders to Sub master Mode 240 Impression 2 user manual SMPTE chapter 20 control interfaces Your console allows you to create and run shows controlled automatically by SMPTE time code Shows consist of a series of lighting cues submas ters and macros programmed to play back at specified times SMPTE times are provided by an internal SMPTE time clock If you wish to run shows using SMPTE time code from an external source you must pur chase the optional SMPTE upgrade A SMPTE program consists of up to 3 000 individual SMPTE events and a Reset Loop time of up to 24 hours A SMPTE event consists of any com bination of two cues loa
59. eo ped ews ue de gets eee Bate 30 Patching dimmers to channels 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 31 Proportional patching 020000 e cee ee eee 32 Unpatching individual dimmers 33 Labeling dimmers nce a he eae beet eens ate eds 34 Assigning a profile to a dimmer 000 00 cece oo 35 Capturing channels in Patch 0 0 00000 cece eee 36 Dimmer CHECK AAA E i Nae ated I has crn oid 37 About 5 suicide A OM eo enti et east 38 About DIMMER cz hee econ ce Ge he ea he ee ce 38 About Dimmer with ETCLink oooo ooooooooooo o oo 39 Multiplexed dimmers ooo 40 Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmerrack 41 Chapter 5 Setting channel levels 2 43 Channel Modest iaa a a o 44 Captured Channels io ado 44 Selected channels cdt os eh Gls Pe 44 Recorded channels 2 000 o 44 MovINg CNanT lS cin a eN ele Bee 44 Tracked channels icono a cos 44 Channel Attributes display 0 0 0 0 00 eee 45 Independent channels ooo 46 FIIPPEd channel iia ua a ls das 47 Labeling a channel 00 000002 enn nne 48 Selecting channels cnica cara ad dug A dd wed 49 Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode 49 Setting channel levels ceerd ossy e Senile whe eaten a are 50 PTA A O a E ERA 50 PUD ies E bs eg es ORS A E db 50 lSvel 250040111 00 00 a Aaea A RACE EN ar De A 50 Has da a li 50 SP Ars Konen Saat LEE Sant ath ta 00 Ue feats
60. fade in the Sneak time established in the Setup menu unless a time is specified Channels may also Sneak to a specified level Example 1 S1 Sneak Enter Example 1 At 7115 S1 Sneak Time 5 Enter Solo Use Solo to clear non selected channels In Live mode press again to restore channels to previous setting Example Channel 1 Thru 1 0 Solo sets the levels of all channels other than channels 1 through 10 to zero Sort Sort is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE and Real Time Programs displays Use S8 Sort to reorder SMPTE events or Real Time Programs by time The system will automatically conduct a sort when the mode is exited or when moving copying or deleting events or programs Stage The Stage display represents the current live channel levels as set by the keypad faders and submasters combined Step Effect Subroutine Step is softkey S1 in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S1 Step to select a step or range of steps for modification Example S1 Step 1 Enter selects step 1 Example S1 Step 5 Thru 9 Enter selects steps 5 through 9 Step SMPTE Step is softkey S5 in the SMPTE Events display Use S5 Step to execute the next SMPTE event in the event list System must be in SMPTE manual or pause mode Impression 2 user manual Steps effect An effect may consist of up to 100 steps A step is made up of chann
61. flipped or independent First used The first cue in which this channel appears Last used The highest numbered cue in which this channel appears Number of cues The total number of cues in which this channel appears Number of moves The total number of cues in which this channel moves Level The channel s current level Source The control device that is providing the channel s level Possible sources include Captured Fader Sub DMX In Parked Whether or not the channel is parked Inhibited The inhibitive submaster if any which is controlling the level of the channel Dimmers The dimmers assigned to the channel as space permits 53 54 Impression 2 user manual chapter O CUES This chapter includes instructions on recording modifying and deleting cues After you select channels and set their intensity levels you can store the resulting look as a cue You can play cues back in a timed fader Impres sion 2 allows you to record up to 600 cues per show This chapter contains the following sections e Cue types e Record functions e Creating cues e Viewing cues e Working with cues in Stage mode e Recording a cue in Stage e Working with cues in Blind mode e Recording a cue in Blind e Recording a cue with a single fade time e Recording a cue with split fade times e Recording a cue with a wait time e Recording cues with Link and Follow e Recording a cue using Solo e Labeling cues e Modifying a re
62. from the previous show Any submasters on stage when you read a new show into the con sole remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new submaster loads submaster LEDs flash indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded show If flashing red the new submaster is inhibitive if green the new submaster is pile on When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flashing 126 Impression 2 user manual Submaster LEDs chapter 11 submasters Each submaster bump button contains one or two LEDs The color and state of the LED indicates the current state of that submaster as shown on the chart below Color State Meaning Off Submaster not loaded Green Solid Submaster pile on or effect loaded Green Slow Blink New pile on or effect submaster Loads when slider reaches home position Green Fast Blink Submaster pile on or effect on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade Red Solid Inhibitive submaster loaded Red Slow Blink New submaster is an inhibitive submaster Loads when slider reaches home position Red Fast Blink Inhibitive submaster on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade Red amp Both on Submaster slider serves as master for DMX In Green If the LED on a slider is blinking slowly it means that you have changed pages and a new submaster is waiting to load The old submaster stays loaded unti
63. function allows the user to specify the desired channel Impression 2 ignores all MIDI commands on channels other than the specified one so be sure your MIDI gear is set to the same channel The console remembers the selected MIDI channel the next time it is turned on Follow these steps to configure Impression 2 for MIDI use 1 Turn console on 2 Press Setup to display Setup menu Then select 6 Options Set tings and press Enter to display the Options Settings menu The fol lowing display appears 01 03 PM ETC MIDI Channel MIDI Show Control Device IDs DMX In Storting Channel Infrored Remote SMPTE Input MPTE Frame isplay C L bled bled Second SMPTE List Ci NOM AWNS Dimmer Moni tor ing Disabled 3 Select 1 ETC MIDI channel and press Enter 4 Enter the MIDI channel you will use 1 16 and press Enter Verify that your MIDI equipment is also set to the same channel Impression 2 will ignore MIDI commands on other channels Press S1 Disable MIDI to disable ETC MIDI mode 229 ETC MIDI message formats The following table lists MIDI message formats used to control Impression 2 All numbers are in Hex format Note off message format lt 8n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt 8 Note off status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key number 0 7F vv Note off velocity 0 7F Note on message format lt 9n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt 9 Note on status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key numbe
64. in Stage display mode Keystrokes 1 2 9 Press Stage Press Group 2 Press Full Select channels you want to modify and adjust chan nel levels Press Record Group Press 2 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Selects the group number you want to modify Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Alters look Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the group number you are modifying Corner reads Group 2 Re records group 2 with modified levels 113 114 Using Update to modify groups The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected group You may record all levels on Stage into the group or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the group You may also add specific new channels to the group at their current Stage levels to add all channels on Stage to the group at their current levels Using Update to add new channels to a group You may use Update to add new channels to an existing group To do so you must specify the channels you wish to add Follow these steps to use Update to add channels Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Select channels to add to Alters look the g
65. is controlled by a number of channels each of which controls a single parameter level tilt vertical movement pan hor izontal movement colors and so forth You create groups that contain all the control channels for each light as shown below In the example below each group contains six channels corresponding to pan tilt intensity cyan magenta and yellow for a specific fixture Group 1 contains all channels for fixture 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 Group 2 contains all channels for fixture 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 Group 3 contains all channels for fixture 3 21 22 23 24 25 26 Group 4 contains all channels for fixture 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 Next you create a set of groups that each contain all the channels that con trol one parameter for your moving lights Group 5 contains all pan controlling channels 01 11 21 31 Group 6 contains all tilt controlling channels 02 12 22 32 Group 7 contains all level controlling channels 03 13 23 33 Now say you wish to change the level for fixtures 1 and 3 The following keystrokes would select only the appropriate channels Group 1 And 3 Only Group 7 This selects groups 1 and 3 which correspond to fixtures 1 and 3 then selects only the channels in those groups which are also in Group 7 the level group 3 and 23 You may now press At 7 5 to set the levels of the two fixtures at 75 percent 120 Impression 2 user manual Group List chapter 10 groups Press Bli
66. is highlighted in yellow Impression 2 user manual Cue List Cue List is softkey S2 in the Blind Cue and Blind Subroutine displays Use S2 Cue List to access the Cue List display which provides a list of recorded cues and cue attributes Cue steps subroutine There are two types of cue step crossfade and allfade The type deter mines how the step s fade runs Crossfade All increasing levels fade during the upfade time all decreasing levels fade during the downfade time Allfade All channels in both faders fade to the level set in the allfade step Days of week Days of week is softkey S3 in the Real Time Programs display Use S3 Days of week to select on which days of the week the real time program will run Decimal point Use the decimal point to select decimal cue numbers 1 9 or decimal fade times Example Cue 5 1 Time 5 Enter sets the fade time for cue 5 1 to half a second Delete Delete is softkey S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the Stage and Fader displays Use S6 Delete to delete the contents of a cue or group The keypad assumes a cue unless otherwise instructed Example S6 Delete 6 Enter Enter deletes cue 6 Example S6 Delete Group 5 Enter Enter deletes group 5 Delete Cue Delete Cue is softkey S6 in the Blind Cue and Blind Subroutine displays Press S6 Delete Cue to delete the contents of a selected or specified cue Ex
67. keys and softkeys in alphabetical order Listings include a description and instructions or exam ples as appropriate for using it A A is softkey S2 in the Patch Park and ETCLink Functions displays S2 A allows selection of the A output of a multiplex dimmer Example Patch Dimmer 1 S2 A Channel 6 Enter patches the A half of multiplex dimmer 1 s output to channel 6 Allfade An allfade cue forces all unused channels to zero intensity when you press Go and clears the other fader Allfade is useful for forcing an end cue when tracking channels Alphanumeric keys Use the optional alphanumeric keyboard to label cues groups or submas ters and to name shows Alternate Alternate is softkey S2 in the Attribute list of the Effect display Use S2 Alternate to program an effect that changes between positive and negative on each pass through the steps If the effect is positive the first pass will be positive the second negative the third positive etc If the effect is negative the first pass will be negative the second positive etc To cancel the Alternate attribute press S2 again And Use And to select more than one dimmer group or channel in a single statement Example Channel 1 And 5 And 8 At 7 5 sets channels 1 5 and 8 at 75 percent At Use At to enter the intensity for a selected dimmer channel or group Example Channel 1 And 4 At 4115 sets ch
68. level assignment determined in the Setup menu Example Channel 6 Levell sets channel 6 to the default level Level Wheel Use the level wheel to proportionally adjust a selected group of channels Example Channel 1 Thru 5 Level Wheel sets the levels for channels 1 through 5 Example Group 5 Level Wheel sets the level on all channels in group Link Use Link to cause the linked cue to be loaded as the next available cue to link a macro execution to a cue or to select a link in the Link List Example Cue 1 Link 8 links cue 8 to cue 1 Example Cue 6 Link Enter Macro 4 Enter links macro 4 to cue 6 Load Check Load Check is softkey S4 in the Load Management display Use S4 Load Check to compare the current load on selected dimmers with their recorded loads 326 Impression 2 user manual Low High Low High is softkey S4 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect display Use S4 Low High to access the level field for the selected step s The first value is the low level to which the step elements will be set the second value is the high level for those elements Example Step 4 Thru 8 S4 Low High 0 gt 9 Enter sets the low level for steps 4 through 8 to zero and the high level to 90 percent Loop subroutine A subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Loop step It then returns to first step and repeats the sequence for the number of times
69. may be up on stage Fade and dwell times for submasters chapter 11 submasters Normally pressing a sub bump brings channel levels to their recorded level immediately If you prefer you can record submasters with fades Impression 2 provides a submaster upfade time downfade time and dwell time Upfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade to their recorded levels when the submaster bump button is pressed Dwell time is the length of time the submaster s channel levels stay at their full recorded levels before the downfade starts Downfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade from their recorded levels to zero When you record fade times for a submaster you can play the recorded fade with the bump button or override it manually with the slider See Con trolling submaster fades manually on page 137 for more information Note Default fade time is O Man 0 meaning the submaster has a zero upfade a manually controlled dwell time and a zero downfade Channels stay at full recorded levels as long as the bump button is held Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds 129 Adding fade and dwell times You can add fade and dwell times
70. mers or run cues from remote locations To install the RFU follow these steps 1 Verify that REU power switch is turned Off Unit is off when switch is in the position toward the bottom edge of the RFU 2 Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the console or Remote Interface labeled RFU 3 Turn RFU power switch to On RFU console connector XLR 6 pin female RFU pinout 1 Data to RFU 2 Data 3 Data from RFU 4 Data 5 Common AC ground 6 12 Vdc fused 2 amp 284 Impression 2 user manual Installing MIDI appendix a installation Connect Impression 2 to any MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable There are three round 5 pin DIN type connectors labeled MIDI In MIDI Out and Keyboard on the back of the console Turn console power off then connect the cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic instrument or sequencer to the MIDI In on the console Connect the cable from the MIDI In on the instrument or sequencer to the connector labeled MIDI Out Warning Do not plug the MIDI cable into the connector labeled Key board This connector is for use with an optional alphanumeric keyboard and may damage MIDI equipment If you like you can set the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru port See next page for more information on this option Follow these steps to connect MIDI equipment to Impression 2 1 Turn console power off 2 Insert standard MIDI cable into the connector on t
71. minutes for the first event to move Copies event 1 to a new event starting at the five minute point the rest of the events maintain their original relationship in time or leave the SMPTE editing screen 251 Editing events Each event in a SMPTE program may contain a combination of cues macros and submaster bump buttons Each of the cues and submasters may have a rate applied and the event may be labeled for easy identifica tions You may add change or delete any of these items from an event by following these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Use the arrow keys to highlight the field of the item you want to edit Enter the new contents of the field If you wish to delete the item press Clear Press Enter or use the arrow keys to select another field Range editing If you wish to apply a change to a range of events you may select multiple events and edit them all in a single step For example if you wanted to set the rates for your first ten events to 50 percent you could do so by follow ing these steps Keystrokes 1 2 252 Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Press S7 until S1 reads Select Event Press S1 Select Event Press 1 Thru 1 0 Press S4 Rate Press 5 0 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the remaining rate fields Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Even
72. mode edit the events as necessary Note You may also enter events using Learn mode in the SMPTE Events display From this display while in Learn mode press Record to enter a blank event Impression 2 user manual Reset Loop time The SMPTE program loop plays from the first event time to the last event time then resets and plays again The first and last times are displayed in the upper right corner of the display and may be set by the user Any events with SMPTE times before the first time or after the last time will not play chapter 20 control interfaces Note A SMPTE loop can last from five seconds up to 24 hours If the loop is set to be less than five seconds the internal clock resets it to five sec onds from the loop s starting time To set or change the first and last event times follow these steps Keystrokes ily 2 Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Press S7 until S8 reads Reset Loop Press S8 Reset Loop Press 1 0 0 0 Press Enter Press 5 0 0 0 10 then press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Prompt reads Enter first valid frame of SMPTE internal time then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields Sets ten seconds as the starting time for the SMPTE show Prompt reads Enter last valid frame of SMPTE internal time then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields Sets the
73. moments for the printer to halt if its buffer is full Style Style is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Use S2 Style to select or edit the sytle of a subroutine control step appendix d reference 339 Style steps subroutine A style is assigned to a subroutine step When the subroutine runs the steps play back in numeric order until the subroutine reaches a style step The style step then determines whether the subroutine will loop bounce hold or end and run a different cue Press Style to select or edit the style of a subroutine control step Example Step 5 Style 1 Enter sets the style of step 5 to loop Sub Use Sub to select a submaster number Example Record Sub 1 Enter records the current look in submaster als Example Group Sub 1 At 7 5 sets the channels in submaster 1 at 75 percent of their recorded levels Sub List Sub List is softkey S2 in the Blind Submaster displays and S3 after More Softkeys in the Stage Display Use Sub List to access the Submaster List display which provides a list of submasters their fade times and labels Submaster A submaster consists of a slider a bump button and one or two LEDs The slider allows you to bring the submaster look up manually The bump button allows you to flash the submaster to its full recorded level or to begin its programmed fade if it has one The LEDs show you which sub maste
74. of hold and a downfade of five sec onds See Setting default fade times on page 17 Time allows the user to set the upfade dwell and downfade time for the overall effect Note Dwell time is the length of time the effect runs between the upfade of the first step and the downfade of the last step Hold assigns an infinite dwell time meaning the effect runs until the associated Clear key or bump button is pressed to start the downfade Times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of sec onds in decimal format Times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Change upfade dwell and downfade Follow these steps to change the effect s fade times Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads upfade time Enter effect upfade time 3 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads dwell time Enter effect dwell time 4 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads downfade time Press Enter effect downfade time Clear for hold dwell 5 Press Enter Fade time entry is complete Prompt reads Select step numbers Change upfade only Follow these steps to change only the effect s upfade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time Prompt reads Enter
75. or Group Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 3 Press 1 Selects cue to copy Corner reads Cue 1 4 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 9 Selects submaster 9 Corner reads Sub 9 6 Press Enter Submaster Contents of cue 1 are copied to copy is complete submaster 9 chapter 11 submasters 139 140 Clearing submasters You must be in Blind or Stage display mode to clear the contents of indi vidual submasters This process erases all level setting instructions and attributes from the submaster To clear all submasters use the Clear Sub masters option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Chapter 18 Clear Functions on page 196 To clear submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number 3 Press S6 Delete Sub Prompt reads To delete submaster s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Enter the number of the Corner reads submaster you want to Sub 2 clear 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter to delete the Contents of submaster 2 are cleared submaster or Clear to cancel the action Impression 2 user manual Submaster List The Submaster List shown below displays a list of the submasters in your
76. outputs flashing fades not run ning smoothly or unselected dimmers rising spontaneously experiment with slower speeds until the symptoms disappear If the symptoms per sist please contact ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 To reset Impression 2 s DMX512 signal speed follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Select 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S4 DMX512 Speed 4 Press 0 for Max 1 for Fast 2 for Medium or 3 for Slow The speed you choose appears in the upper right corner of the display 5 Press Enter to confirm your choice 6 Display indicates new speed setting Impression 2 user manual Updating Impression 2 software appendix a installation Impression 2 software updates are distributed on diskette Follow these steps to update the software in your Impression 2 console Make sure the diskette is the correct one for your console 1 Installing new console software clears all system memory Please save your current show 2 Turn the console off 3 Insert the console software diskette into your console s diskette drive 4 Turn the console back on The console displays the boot screen and automatically installs the software This process takes approximately one minute The console displays the following messages as the installation progresses Loading Erasing Flash Writing Flash Wait until the Stage display appears 5 Press Setup to
77. range at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room immediately The phasing in Rack ff is not allowed The rack has been shut down Please check the input power service Impression 2 user manual appehdix c specifications Electrical Voltage input 90 250 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 6 3 amps Internal interfaces Up to 1 024 DMX512 outputs Parallel printer RS 232C serial port Remote Focus Unit Infrared Remote Focus Unit Remote Macro option Alphanumeric keyboard MIDI SMPTE DMX512 Input ETCLink System capacity 600 cues per show 300 control channels Proportional patching of up to 1 024 DMX512 dimmers Eight part multipart cues Ten dimmer profile options 500 groups 2 000 macros regions 3 000 SMPTE events 24 overlapping submasters Ten pages of submaster memory Two timed manual fader pairs Fader functions Fade times programmable from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades User selectable default fade times Hold Back functions 306 Playback controls Two timed manual fader pairs Two Go buttons Two Hold buttons Two Back buttons Two Rate buttons Two Clear buttons 24 submasters Programmable Master on 100mm potentiometer Blackout function Level Rate wheel Eight softkeys to streamline operations Display functions One VGA video output Extensive online Help displays avai
78. recorded cues In each fader the left slider A and C controls upfades The right sliders B and D control downfades You A B may play back a cue automatically using the A timing information programmed into it or you QO may take manual control You can play back cues one at a time through a single fader or you can play back a different cue in each fader simultaneously You can also play a cue in one fader leave it there and then play another cue in the second fader For example you may want to play a ten minute sunset cyc cue in one fader and play several cues during the same period in the other fader Each fader slider has a strip of LEDs next to it When running a timed crossfade cue the lit LEDs indicate the progress of the cue This is displayed as a percentage For example when Y emi the LEDs are at 5 50 percent of the cue has So Hola run Impression 2 s faders function in level override mode This means that the fader sliders control the percentage of completion of the fade If you like you can use the fader sliders to take manual control of fades For information on taking manual control of fades see the section titled Controlling fades manually later in this lesson Clearing faders Each timed fader is equipped with a blue Clear key To remove a cue from the fader press the appropriate Clear key Press Clear twice to clear an effect cue Pressing Clear
79. s Label function allows you to assign an alphanumeric label of up to 16 characters to a channel To label a channel follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display Prompt reads Select channel number s 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel to label to label and press Label Prompt reads Use Thru And and Type channel label Except to select multiple F6 clear to end channels F7 last channel label F8 next channel label 4 Use an alphanumeric key Channel is labeled board to enter the chan nel s label then press Enter Impression 2 user manual Selecting channels Using the keypad to set channel levels involves two steps selecting the channels whose levels you want to modify then entering output levels e To select a single channel enter the channel number For example Channel 1 selects channel 1 Note When selecting channels you only need to press Channel if the Channel LED is not lit e To select two channels that are not consecutively numbered enter the number of the first channel then press And and enter the number of the second channel For example Channel 1 And 7 selects channels 1 and 7 e To select a group of consecutively numbered channels enter the number of the first channel then press Thru and enter the last number For example Channel 1 Thru 9 selects
80. set at any level such as channel 5 above it is considered tracked at clear 81 Recording modified cues The difference between Record and Track is apparent when you modify a cue or insert a new cue between two existing cues Record and Track pro duce different results The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 Stage Rel Rel Release captured channels Cue 1 Go Play back cue 1 Chan 1 At 510 Modify channel 1 to 50 percent With cue 1 in a fader channel 1 is modified to 50 percent To change a channel level that affects only the cue you modify use Record Modify the cue press Record enter the cue number and press Enter Only the current cue is modified The track that encompasses the channel is inter rupted but continues in the following cues at the originally tracked level The results of modifying cue 1 and using Record are illustrated in Figure 2 Chant Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 2 Note that channel 1 is not affected in cues 2 and 3 Also note that when you record a modified cue that is in a playback fader the changes are reflected in the fader That is when you release the channels you have modified they remain on stage Impression 2 user manual chapter 7 track If you change the level in the beginning or middle of a track you may want the change to continue throu
81. show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softkey on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays chapter 5 setting channel levels 49 Setting channel levels You assign output levels to channels using the basic format Channel At 4 where the first number is the channel and the second is the level For example Channel 4 At 7115 sets channel 4 at 75 percent If you enter a single digit for the level Impression 2 multiplies it by ten and you must follow it with Enter In other words Channel 4 At 1 Enter sets channel 4 to 10 percent To set channel 4 to 1 percent enter Chan nel 4 At 0111 You can also use the level wheel Full Level or S8 Flash to set channel levels Level wheel Full To set channel levels with the level wheel select the channels whose levels you want to modify then use the wheel to set the desired output level You can also use the wheel to adjust output levels for all active channels To set selected channel levels enter Channel 1 Thru 5 then move the level wheel to set levels To modify all channels currently at a level above zero press Enter then move the level wheel to set levels Full sets selected channel levels to 100 pe
82. submaster bump button 4 Presssubmaster6 sbump Current levels are recorded into button submaster 6 on submaster page 2 Impression 2 user manual Using Except to record a submaster without another submaster s channels Impression 2 allows you to program a submaster containing all the current levels on stage except for those contributed by a specific cue group or another submaster chapter 11 submasters This example illustrates how you record a submaster without including levels contributed by the specified submaster Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Select desired channels and set channel levels Press Record Sub Press 5 Press Except Sub 3 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects submaster 5 to be recorded Instructs that levels raised by submaster 3 be ignored Prompt reads Select excepted submaster number Records submaster 5 minus submaster 3 s levels Note Press Cue or Group in place of Sub in step 5 to leave out the channels supplied by a cue or group Note Except will not work with effect cues or effect submasters 133 Creating inhibitive submasters A red LED on the bump button indicates an inhibitive submaster Only submasters 13 through 24 may be inhibitive Inhibitive submasters allow you to limit the output of a group of channels Channel outp
83. tee 170 Cani eling a Maco iaa a PRR a ee 170 POWETUD MAACO wd vances Aaa oa Daas PR ee ee 170 MOdifVING MacOS roste ney iad Paar so dnd ge a Ghd we ee 171 Clearing MACOS 3 42 E a Kaen ea aa es Dua nta 171 COPYING MACOS stat ee ls a ot li 172 Sample Macros tes ar a Di 173 Chapter 15 Diskette functions ss 175 Diskette ManageMent ooooococcoc cece eee 176 Formatting disketteS ooocococoooococoo 177 Recording a show on diskette 0 0 0 0 0 0 178 Reading a show from diskette 0 0 0 0 0 cee 179 Chapter 16 Printinge AAA A OR EEE BERR EA 181 POINTER OPUS 4 hs dales das BE as da SKE ol a a RK Dn k ege 182 Stage dl it EE da 182 A e a e SER 183 A A A A A SIN eee 184 SUDMasterSo ul cs E Lo ll dd Abed o SAA 185 A A O 186 COUP Llistat At ia ds a 186 SUBMASTER LIST r erene dad dat Bande od 187 UTA RAI A A otha tk gl sette 188 Pata E A A A A a dia 189 Channel Attributes 22 0 keen eee eee 189 Real Time Programs n saaana 000000 eee 190 SMPTE EVEN HS rte Cas os a Ra oa lod o tld ta de a 190 TRACKS EC Teeter fot e weg hone bia one ata leur aks leer 191 Chapter 17 Clear fUnctiONS ooo 193 SNOW aaa 195 A aa acne eae Nr Se 1 oe Sa iN ge eee ated Sas Ease 195 OOPS iris ar wt ih whe Tah AROSE Be heads Od 195 SUDIMASTCIS shins fA ieee iy RER en a JO ido pele rod de thee tna J 196 Showe eand Patch ge ojo hee a8 la ces Soko 196 Designer s Worksheet nuanua aana aaa 197 Macros viii a A A eke A dt SR
84. the console to send the following com mands to MIDI devices If MSC output is enabled on the console the con sole automatically sends the MSC commands The console s transmitter Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device receiving the signals A B Go If a cue is pending the console transmits A B Go with cue number and a list entry of 1 If a cue is holding the console transmits A B Resume with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Go If a cue is pending the console transmits C D Go with cue number and a list entry of 2 If a cue is holding the console transmits C D Resume with cue number and a list entry of 2 A B Hold If a cue is running the console transmits A B Stop with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Hold If a cue is running the console transmits C D Stop with cue number and a list entry of 2 Macros For macros 1 127 the console transmits Fire with the macro number 235 236 Real time clock The Real Time Clock allows you to program macros to run in real time that is to run automatically at any time of day on any day of the week For example you might program the work lights to come on for a choir rehearsal between 7 PM and 9 PM on Monday and Wednesday Or you might want to warm the filaments of your studio instruments 15 minutes prior to your news program You can record up to 500 real time programs This section includes instructions for cr
85. the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 1 8 to the ground pin 10 e Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential be tween the Macro and Macro pins and switch either of these leads appendix a installation 299 300 Impression 2 user manual appendix b error messages Diskette error messages Bad Disk Disk is unformatted or defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk Write protected disk The write protect tab on this diskette is open Close the tab to unprotect the diskette No disk in drive Show diskette must be inserted in the diskette drive before you can save or read a show Disk controller failure Call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 Unknown disk error try again Try the diskette again If it fails again call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 Corrupted Disk This disk is defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk File not found This disk does not appear to have a show stored on it Please confirm that you have inserted the correct disk Disk full Disk contains other files Remove enough files to make room for show file Disk access failed because of tracking failure This message appears on the backup console in a Full Tracking Backup system when the network or the master console fails during a diskette operation Other error messages Out of memory You have used up all system memory allotted to the function
86. to channels already in group Updates channel levels in group 5 115 116 Labeling groups Impression 2 allows you to use an alphanumeric keyboard to assign labels to groups See page 278 for more information about selecting and install ing a keyboard Group labels can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long Follow these steps to add a label to a group Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group 1 Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER 3 Press Enter Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press Label Prompt reads Type group label F6 clear to end F7 last group label F8 next group label 5 Use the alphanumeric key Corner reads board to entera label Type Label Scene 1 Cyc Scene 1 Cyc 6 On the Impression 2 key Group 1 is labeled pad press Enter Note Press F7 or F8 on the alphanumeric keyboard to select the previ ous group or the next group to label Impression 2 user manual Deleting groups You must be in Stage mode to delete individual groups To delete all groups you can use the Clear Groups option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Chapter 18 Clear Functions on page 195 To delete individual groups follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 P
87. you specify When you create the Loop step enter the number of times you want the loop to return to the top of the step list If you enter 5 the sequence will play six times Enter 0 to create a continuous loop M1 M5 Use macro keys M1 M5 to immediately execute the associated macro instructions M Analogous in function to macro keys M1 M5 used for macros 1 5 M is used for macros 6 and higher Press M then enter macro number and press Enter Macro A macro allows you to store a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes Macros simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can program up to 2 000 macros in Impression 2 depending on how large they are Macro Real Time SMPTE Macro is softkey S4 in the Real Time Programs display and S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S4 or S6 Macro to access a macro to run as part of a program or event Macro Wait Use Macro Wait to place a pause in the macro execution The Macro Wait instruction may be placed in the macro as many times as required Example Learn M4 Enter Dim 1 At 7115 Macro Wait 5 Enter M5 appendix d reference 327 Manual If a submaster has a manual dwell its upfade starts when you press and hold the bump button lt runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full as long as you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release i
88. 0 Dimmers 274 ETCNet 288 Infrared Remote Focus Unit 297 MIDI 285 Printer 279 Remote Interface 290 Remote macro 298 Remote monitors 296 Remote Video Interface 292 RFU 284 SMPTE 287 Internal Clock 324 IRFU 203 Italic 3 J Jumper settings 269 271 MIDI Out Thru 286 Jumpers 269 Jump to cue 159 325 352 K Keypad Numbers 325 Keys About 38 53 Back 103 Clear 99 Except 49 320 Follow 66 Full 50 Go 102 Group 118 Hold 102 Label 116 210 Learn 164 Level 50 Link 66 Only 120 Rate 105 Solo 68 109 Sub Page 126 Type 125 L Label 45 325 Channel 48 Cues 69 Dimmer 34 Group 116 Submasters 138 Last Page 325 Learn 325 Learn Macro 325 Learn mode SMPTE 325 Macro 164 SMPTE 246 LEDs Faders 99 Submaster 127 Left Arrow 326 Level 50 159 326 Default Level 18 Level wheel 50 326 Lighting Playback Controller 257 Link 66 67 326 Macro to macro 168 List Cue List 76 100 Group List 121 Submaster List 141 142 Load 326 Cue or group to sub 139 Effects 156 Errors 218 Load Check 216 326 Loop 159 Loop subroutine 327 Low levels 144 Low High Levels 327 LPC 257 M M 327 M1 M5 327 Macro 163 327 Cancel 170 Clear 171 Clear all 197 Copy 172 Creating 164 165 Display mode 166 Edit 171 Learn 164 325 Link to cue 67 Link to macro 168 M 327 M1 M5 327 Macro Wait 167 207 327 Macro wait 327 Modify 171 Play 170 Print 188 Remote 299 Remote macros 257 Remote Trigger 258 Samples 173 SMPTE 327 Speci
89. 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Prompt reads 1 to 1 Enter To reset patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Patch is reset Returns to Setup menu Channel Attributes Clear Channel Attributes erases all channel attribute information from a show To erase all channel attribute information follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 1111 Clear Chan Prompt reads nel Attribute Enter To clear channel attributes press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enterl Channel attribute settings are cleared Returns to Setup menu 198 Impression 2 user manual Real Time Programs Clear Real Time Programs erases all program information from a show To erase all programs follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 4 Clear Func tions Enter 3 Press 1 2 Clear Real Time Programs Enter 4 Press Enter SMPTE Action Displays Setup menu Displays Clear Functions menu Prompt reads Select function num ber then press ENTER Prompt reads To clear all real time clock programs press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Programs cleared Returns to Setup menu Clear SMPTE Event
90. 100 FL 112 Fl 124 FL arked Dimmers 15 16 85 85 Parked Channels 101 102 FI FL 113 114 Fl FL 125 FL Note Blackout will turn off parked dimmers and channels unless they are independent channels Nothing else affects a parked dimmer or chan nel s level The following options are described in this chapter Par ing dimmers Unparking dimmers Par ing channels Unparking channels Par Par ing groups cues and submasters display 260 Parking dimmers To park a dimmer indicate the dimmer you want to park and the level at which to park it Once it is parked nothing you do at the console will have any effect on that light except for Blackout until you unpark the dimmer When dimmers are parked the monitor displays a message at the top of the display that says Park Enabled To park a dimmer follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Dim Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark 3 Enter the dimmer number Selects the dimmer to park to park then press At Prompt reads Enter intensity for park dimmer s 4 Enter the level at which Parks the dimmer at the selected level to park the dimmer Alert appears Parked Dimmers Impression 2 user manual chapter 22 park Unparking dimmers You may unpark one or all dimmers at any time When a dimmer is unparked it
91. 11 PT 25 Headquor ters Part Cue 11 2 5 Softkeys BR O Pe REE Cue List Grandmaster Current Grandmaster setting Blackout alert and submaster page Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner Indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Channel level display Current level of all channels set by either or both faders Prompt area Information and prompts appear here Fader status Indicates current status of both fader pairs Shows cue running in fader fade times percentage of completion and follow times Attribute bar Shows current settings for selected cue group or submaster Softkeys Fader functions for S1 through S8 Cue List Lists all cues along with their attributes The next cue in the cue list is yel low This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind Flexichannel If your system has the Flexichannel feature enabled only channels used somewhere in the show appear on the display screens These channels may be in cues submasters or groups or may be channels you have selected recently By only displaying channels used in the show you can reduce the amount of time you spend moving from page to page to find channels All other screen elements a
92. 161 Editing a subroutine To edit a subroutine select the step you wish to change by pressing S1 Step and entering the step number Use And and Thru to select multi ple steps Selected steps are displayed in white on the monitor Note If you select a range of steps only cue steps will be selected Style steps may only be edited individually and will be left out of selected ranges Once the step is selected choose the attribute you wish to edit by press ing one of the following softkeys The selected attribute is displayed in yellow on the monitor S2 Style Allows you to select a style from the style menu S3 Select Cue Allows you to enter a cue number for the selected step S4 Type Level Allows you to select a crossfade or an allfade and to set intensity level S8 Up Down Follow Allows you to set upfade and downfade times and to set follow time Once you finish editing the subroutine press Record Enter to save your changes Note You may use the arrow keys to move from one field or line to the next For example press J to select the next step or press gt to enter information one field to the right of the current field Deleting a step Press S6 Delete Step and enter the step number Then press Enter Impression 2 deletes the selected step and renumbers the remaining steps Inserting a step Press S1 Step and enter the step number where you want to insert the new step The
93. 44 Effect 151 Submaster 130 131 E Edit Clear submasters 140 Copy cues 74 Copy groups 117 Copy submaster 138 139 Cue in Blind 62 Cue List 76 Delete cue 74 Effects 153 155 Events 244 Load submaster 139 Macro 171 Range of effect steps 147 Range of groups 77 Range of submasters 142 SMPTE programs 248 Submasters 135 Update cue 72 Effect 56 143 319 1 to 1 channel 147 Alternate 148 Attributes 148 Bounce 148 Build 148 Configuring 148 Creating steps 145 Cue 56 156 319 Dwell time 144 Fade time 150 High and low levels 144 In time 144 Insert step 153 Modify 153 assignment index Negative 148 Out time 144 Positive 148 Random 148 Random Rate 152 Record as cue 156 Reverse 148 Specifications 307 Step element 147 Step time 144 Steps 144 144 146 339 Submaster 124 156 319 Electronic Theatre Controls 2 Element 147 Enable Blackout key 21 DMX In 240 ETCLink 212 319 ETCLink messages 212 Record Lockout 24 Sliders 20 Enter 319 Enter Macro 319 Error messages 225 303 ETC MIDI 228 Configuring 229 Message format 229 230 ETCLink 211 219 About Dimmer 39 Advisory messages 225 303 Backup looks 223 Check Loads 215 Clear Loads 217 Enable 212 319 Error messages 225 Fatal messages 225 303 Load errors 218 Record Loads 214 Secondary messages 304 Set dimmer 222 Unset dimmer 222 ETCLink Functions 211 212 226 ETCNet 288 296 Events Edit 244 Except 133 320 F Fade Fade Type 342 Multipart 96 Rate 105
94. 5 Time 6 Wait 6 Enter sets cue 5 to wait six sec onds before starting a six second upfade Example Cue 7 Wait Wait 5 Enter sets cue 7 to wait five seconds before starting the downfade appendix d reference 343 344 Wheel Use the wheel to proportionally adjust the levels of a selected group of channels Also May be used as a rate wheel when fader Rate key is active to alter the rate of fades Example Channel 1 Thru 5 Wheel adjusts the levels of channels 1 through 5 Example AB Rate Wheel adjusts the rate of the fades in the A B fader Impression 2 user manual APPEndIX SOftKEYS The following charts show all available softkeys on Impression 2 consoles using software version 2 0 Stage 1 Sneak 2 Update 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Park 7 More Softkeys gt Stage 2 8 Flash Blind Cue 1 2 2 Cue List Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 E 8 f Blind Multipart 1 E 2 Cue List Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Part 7 E 8 a Blind Group 1 Select Group 2 Group List gt Group List 3 E 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Group 7 8 Blind Submaster 1 Bump Status 2 Sub List gt Sub List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 s 8 E Stage 2 1 Enable Disable Quickstep Dis 3 Sub Li
95. 7 100 Toad exits Wait Link Follow Rate 110 1 2 Gunshot List Rate Cue 61 62 Recording a cue in Blind This example creates a cue in Blind mode Blind allows you to work on cues without affecting the look on stage Impression 2 automatically enters 00 for channels used in cue 1 to indicate that they will downfade in cue 2 Follow these steps to record cue 2 in Blind mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 2 Press 2 Selects cue 2 3 Press Channel 1 8 Selects channel 13 Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press And 11151 Adds channel 15 to your selected channels Selected channels are displayed in yellow 5 Press Full Sets channels at full intensity level Note When using Full you do not have to press At first 6 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 7 Press Enter Records cue 2 with channels 13 and 15 at Full When you record the cue channel levels set by a fader change from red indicating a channel level set on the keypad to colors based on the chan nels level movements from cue to cue See page 6 for more information on what channel level colors mean Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Recording a cue with a single fade time Unless you tell it otherwise Impression 2 assigns default fade times to an
96. 77 ler change 77 er change 78 er change 79 er change 80 er change 81 er change 82 er change 83 er change 84 er change 85 ler change 86 ler change 87 ler change 88 ler change 89 ler change 90 ler change 91 ler change 92 60 71 72 83 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 parameter 0 parameters 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 parameters 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 231 MIDI Show Control MSC The consoles recognize the following MSC commands e Go e Stop e Resume e Fire The consoles ignore all other commands The commands can be received and or transmitted 232 Impression 2 user manual Configuring MIDI Show Control Each device receiving MIDI Show Control information must be assigned a device ID Impression 2 can receive MSC information transmit MSC infor mation or both To enable input and or output of MSC and to assign MSC device IDs for incoming and outgoing data do the following 1 Press Setup to go to the Setup menu 2 Press 6 Enter to select the Options Settings menu The following display appears 01 03 PM ETC MIDI Channe
97. ADA AA 197 Reset 1 to 1 Patch 00 0 002 eee 198 Channel Attributes lente aad enema as web es 198 Real Time Programs 000200 0 eee eee 199 SMP UE ee 8 Sh vd aa fa Petey cae Chen Meee Boe on Bites cado ood 199 ROSES 2 fo hae te tl ee ihe pelts ie oie 200 Chapter 18 ACCESSOTICS a o seen eee 201 Remote Focus Unit RFU 0 000 20020002 o 202 Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU 000 203 Designer s Worksheet 2 00000 eee eee eee 205 Using the Designer s Worksheet 205 Programming regionS 0 00 ee eee 206 Macro Walt sv of acorn En oh Pee ee ee ee 207 COPYINGMEGIONS ria ood PR ee ee 208 Clearing TEGIONS 2 866 cute Renae dad Medea had hd Gee Ne 209 Alphanumeric keyboard nnana aaan 210 Naming cues submasters groups and shows 210 Naming SNOWS ieni a rn Sah teens Bee ee ee 210 Impression 2 user manual Chapter 19 Sensor DIMAS AA AAA A Mom 211 EnablingtET Glink Gef et e yt fk sad dos 212 Enabling ETCLink messages sider oreore cee eee 212 Monitoring dimmers ooo 213 Recording dimmer loads 00000020 0c eee 214 Checking dimmer loads 0 00000 cece e eee 215 Clearing dimmer loads ED ene eon r eae wR eY 217 la TROIS tne Se os Se ates a cc es oie RAE E etek 218 Sensor dimming system status 2000000002 cee 219 Dimmer rack status oz te rl San hai a bred ee 220 Dimmer Stat o dis 221 Setting and unsetting di
98. At 00 Enter Chan Full 4 work lights channel Clear faders and turn work lights on This macro clears both faders and selects work lights Clear AB Clear CD Channel Full Macro line reads Clear AB Clear CD Chan ff Full work lights channel Clear unused channels in Flexichannel mode This macro clears channels that are visible but no longer in use Because this macro uses a softkey you must create it using Learn Setup 1 Enter S1 Stage Macro line reads Setup 1 Enter PurgeFlexi Stage Record show on disk This macro records the current show on disk Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter Macro line reads Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter 173 174 Impression 2 user manual chapter 15 diskette functions This chapter includes instructions for using Impression 2 s diskette options Impression 2 is equipped with a 3 5 inch high density diskette drive on the console s right end panel It allows you to save backup copies of shows on diskette The Disk Functions menu is shown below 1 Write Show To Disk 2 Read Show From Disk 3 4 Format Disk The following options are described in this chapter e Formatting diskettes e Recording a show on diskette e Reading a show from diskette Diskette management Impression 2 s diskette drive lets you save one show per high density 3 5 inch computer diskette This allows you to work on More than one show at a time or to use more than 600 cues for
99. Blind display Falling channel levels are displayed in green Channel levels displayed in magenta indicate that the channel is tracking i e that its level is the same as in the previous cue The following examples demonstrate how Track works They include five cues each with five channels In these examples when a channel changes level from one cue to the next it is printed in bold tracked chan nels are printed normally This corresponds to how Blind displays levels channels that rise or fall are displayed in blue or green tracked channels are displayed in magenta Impression 2 user manual chapter 7 track Using record to create tracks In Stage mode the following keystrokes create the five cues illustrated below Each cue adds channels to the previous cue The example uses Record to record the cues Cue 1 Chan 1 Full Record 1 Enter Cue 2 Chan 2 Full Record 2 Enter Cue 3 Chan 3 Full Record 3 Enter Cue 4 Chan 1 At 2115 Chan 4 Full Record 4 Enter Cue 5 Chan 1 Thru 4 At 0 0 Record 5 Enter These keystrokes produce the results illustrated in Figure 1 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 FF Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 1 Notice the vertical tracks that develop when a channel remains at the same level through a number of cues For example channel 1 tracks from cue 1 to cue 3 When a channel is not
100. Controls Inc Middleton WI 53562 USA declares that the product Product name Model Product Options conforms to the following product specifications EN 60950 CISPR 22 EN55022 Class B Safety EMC Expression 2 lighting control console Expression 2x Concept 2x Insight 2x Insight 2 Impression 2 Lighting Playback Controller This declaration covers all options of the above products IEC 801 2 1984 IEC 1000 4 2 1995 01 8KV AD IEC 801 3 1984 ENV 50140 ENV 50204 1993 3 V M 26 1000 MHz IEC 801 4 1988 IEC 1000 4 4 1995 01 Supplementary information 5kV Sig Lines 1kV power line The products herewith comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by Directive 92 31 EEC Middleton Wisconsin USA 25 April 1995 Jonath R Ide Vice President of Research and Development European contact Your local ETC Technical Services office or ETC Ltd 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU UK Tel 44 181 896 1000 Fax 44 181 896 2000 table of contents Chapter 1 Introduction A A AA A AR 1 TROUBIESHOOUAG sc cora Bee on Meee BE ra A Bee OS 2 Using this martial senet ed acy oink ee eee dat Se 3 USING Helpis orta ci ees BEG ae 3 TLEXHCONVENTIONS 2 2054 605 ct de e ons eG a die a a cans 3 Output level conventions 0 0 0 0 0 0c eee 3 About SHOW arbeitet Era Sete Merge ete 4 Chapter 2 Monitor displays
101. Disabled 1 Grandmaster 2 Sub Grandmaster 4 Press 1 Enter Master is set as Grandmaster Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 sets your console s channels to a one to one match with your submasters Thus channel 1 is patched to submas ter 1 channel 2 to submaster 2 and so on Channel levels are set to Full and up dwell down times are set to 1 Manual 1 To reset your channels and submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 1 System Settings Displays System Settings menu Enter 3 Press 1111 Set Channels Prompt reads Submasters 1 to 1 Enter Select page to default then press ENTER 1 Page 1 2 Page 2 0 All pages 4 Press Enter Channels are assigned to submasters The display returns to Setup menu chapter 3 system settings 23 Setting time format Impression 2 consoles allow you to display time in either 12 or 24 hour for mat Follow these steps to choose your preference Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 1112 12 24 hour clock and press Enter 4 Enter 0 or 1 and press Enter Record Lockout Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter 12 or 24 hour clock 0 12 hour 1 24 hour Sets the clock mode You may set the console to disable the Record function This protects a finish
102. Groups 107 119 Independent 46 Label 48 Levels 50 Match to submasters 23 Modes 44 Moving 44 Park 262 Print channel attributes 189 Recorded 44 Selected 44 Selecting channels 49 Setting number 16 Sneak 51 Specifications 306 System settings 16 Tracked 44 Update cue 71 72 Wheel 50 Channel attributes Clear all 198 Check Channel check 52 Cue check 106 Dimmer check 37 Dimmer loads 215 Circuit board Main Processor Rev 0 270 Node Revision A 271 293 Clear 193 312 Channel Attributes 198 Clear fader 313 Clear keypad 312 Clear Functions menu 194 Clear Loads 313 Cues 195 Designer s Worksheet 197 Fader 99 Functions 194 Groups 117 195 Loads 217 Macros 171 197 316 Patch 198 Real Time Programs 199 Regions 197 209 313 Reset system 200 Show 195 Show and Patch 196 SMPTE events 199 248 Submasters 140 196 Clock 24 26 Clock Disable 313 Clock Enable 313 Colors Channel 6 LEDs 127 Submasters 76 141 Connectors Alphanumeric keyboard 278 Dimmer 274 Infrared Remote Focus Unit 297 Monitor 296 Printer 279 RFU 284 Console Sliders 20 Copy Copy Event 313 Copy Macro 313 Copy Region 314 Cue or group to sub 139 Cues 74 Group 117 Macro 172 Region 208 SMPTE events 250 Submaster to other page 137 Submasters 138 139 Copy Program 314 Creating cues 58 Crossfade 56 314 315 Subroutine step 158 Cue 55 314 Allfade 56 As groups 118 Back 103 Blackout cue 86 Blind 61 Clear all 195 Convert to multipart 93 Co
103. Instruc tions for using the Track function are included in Chapter 7 Track 57 Creating cues Impression 2 allows you to save up to 600 cues per show A cue is a look you have created and recorded and can replay in a timed fader pair If your show requires more than 600 cues you can read a second show from dis kette during a break or between cues See Chapter 17 Diskette func tions for more information about recording shows on diskette This chapter includes instructions and examples for creating and modify ing cues using several different methods If you follow the examples you will have several cues recorded You will also know how to modify copy and delete cues If you have several cues already stored you may want to use the look from one cue and modify it to create another In other circumstances you may want to enter all channel levels manually There are several ways you can go about creating any one look The fol lowing instructions give examples of how you could generate each cue Note Before you clear cues as described below make sure that the show currently in the console memory is saved on diskette The examples in this chapter assume there are no cues stored in the con sole To erase any cues press Setup 4 Enter 2 Enter Enter Viewing cues You can view stored cues in two ways live in Stage mode or just on the screen in Blind mode To view cues live you must select the cue and play it
104. Next Page Next Page is softkey S5 in many displays Press S5 Next Page to go forward one display page Off Sub Bump appendix d reference Off Sub Bump is softkey S2 after S7 More Soitkeys in the Macro Editing and Designer s Worksheet Editing displays Use S5 Off Sub Bump in a macro instruction to force the submaster off via the submaster bump button The downfade will occur in the down fade time for that bump button Use the actual submaster bump button or the keypad when recording the macro Example Select Macro 5 Enter S5 Off Sub Bump Submaster 1 s bump button Enter Macro creates a macro that down fades submaster 1 On Sub Bump On Sub Bump is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the Macro Editing and Designer s Worksheet Editing displays Use S4 On Sub Bump in a macro instruction to force the submaster on via the submaster bump button The upfade will occur in the upfade time for that bump button Use the actual submaster bump button or the keypad when recording the macro The submaster will fade out after the dwell time has elapsed unless It is programmed with a hold Only Use Only to select a subset of the currently selected channels Example Group 2 5 And 2 6 Only Group 5 At 7115 Only Group 1 0 At 5 0 takes all the channels that are in group 25 and 26 sets those channels that are also in group 5 to 75 percent and sets those that are also in g
105. Note Once you are in Group Editing mode use S1 Select Group rather than Group to bring up a different group Use Group to access another group s levels as you modify the selected group 117 112 Modifying groups Impression 2 allows you to modify groups in Stage or Blind modes In Blind Follow these steps to add channels to a group in Blind display mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level 3 Press 1 Selects group 1 s channels Corner reads Group 1 4 Press Enter Brings up group 1 in group editing mode Channel levels should be white Prompt reads Select channel numbers Warning You must press Enter after you enter the group number If you do not Impression 2 displays the channels used in the group but does not enter Group Editing mode 5 Press 2 5 Thru 3110 Modifies look adding channels 25 At 5 0 through 30 at 50 percent 6 Press Record Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 7 Press Enter Records group 1 with new levels Note This process can also be used to create a new group in Blind display mode If the group number you enter to modify doesn t exist it is created as a new group Impression 2 user manual chapter 10 groups In Stage Follow these steps to change a group s channel levels
106. Press 1114 Print Track Prompt reads sheet Enter Select channel number to track then press ENTER 4 Enter channel number File sent to the printer then press Enter 191 192 Impression 2 user manual chapter 17 clear functions This chapter includes instructions for using Impression 2 s clear options Each of the following clear functions is explained and illustrated on the fol lowing pages e Show e Cues e Groups e Submasters e Show and patch e Designer s Worksheet e Macros e Reset patch e Channel attributes e Real Time Programs e SMPTE events e Reset system 194 Clear functions Each option on the Clear Functions menu erases information regarding an Impression 2 function from the console s memory If that information is saved in a show on a diskette it can be restored to the console Other wise the information is lost permanently Warning Be certain to save your shows on disk before erasing informa tion you may need in the future See Chapter 16 Diskette functions for information about saving shows All clear options are located on the Clear Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 4 Clear Functions and press Enter Impression 2 displays the Clear Functions menu illustrated below Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Reset Clear Clear Clear Show Cues Groups Submas ters Show and Patch Designer s Worksheet Macros Patch
107. Press Record then enter the number of the cue you want to record For exam ple press 1 21 Press Part then use the keypad to enter the number of the part you want to record Parts can be assigned a number from 1 to 8 and can be cre ated in any sequence Press Enter Repeat steps 2 through 5 adding channels for each part you want to include in the multipart cue Action Selects Stage display mode The Prompt reads Select channel numbers Indicates that you want to record a cue Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the part number to record Prompt reads Select part number to record To cancel press CLEAR Records subsequent parts Maximum number of parts is eight Note You do not need to re enter the cue number for additional parts Set channel levels press Record Part enter the part number and press Enter Note Follow Link and Label attributes may be assigned to the overall cue Impression 2 user manual Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue chapter 8 multipart cues If you have already created a single part cue Impression 2 allows you to reconfigure it as a multipart cue You can convert a standard cue to a mul tipart cue in either Stage or Blind mode As you break the cue into parts to convert it to a multipart cue Impression 2 automatically creates cue part 8 Any channels not included in the first recorded part are
108. Prompt reads To copy selected event s select time and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 7 Press Time Time 2 5 Selects 25 seconds for the first event to copy 8 Press Enter Copies event 1 to anew event starting at 25 seconds the rest of the events maintain their original relationship in time 250 Impression 2 user manual Moving SMPTE events The system allows you to move one or more SMPTE events from one time slot to another Follow these steps to move a block of SMPTE events chapter 20 control interfaces Keystrokes 1 2 Note To move a single event you may also use the arrow keys to high light the SMPTE time for the event you want to move then press or lH until the new SMPTE time is displayed in the keypad prompt window and press Enter Or use the keypad to enter the new time then press Enter The event will move to the new time when you sort the event list Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Press S7 until S3 reads Move Event Press S3 Move Event Press 1 Thru 5 Press Enter Press Time Time Time 5 Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Prompt reads Select event number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects events 1 through 5 to move Prompt reads To move selected event s select time and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects five
109. SMPTE show to reset at the five minute mark 247 Editing SMPTE programs Once you have created a SMPTE program you can easily make changes In the SMPTE edit display use the arrow keys to move the highlight around in the display screen Press lt or gt to move the highlight hori zontally Press T or Y to move the highlight vertically When you reach the right end of a line press gt to move to the next line When you reach the last line press J and enter a time to add a new SMPTE event Editing Features The console s SMPTE editing features allow you to Insert Copy Move and Delete events You may apply these functions to individual events or to a range of events Deleting SMPTE events Follow these steps to delete SMPTE events Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setupl Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 3 SMPTE Selects SMPTE Events display mode Events and press Enter 3 Press S7 until S6 reads Delete Event 4 Press S6 Delete Event Prompt reads Select event number s to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 5 And 6 Enter Enters events 5 and 6 to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter to delete the event or Clear to leave it unchanged Note The Clear SMPTE Events menu option on the Clear menu allows you to delete all recorded SMPTE events To do so press Setup 4 Enter 1 3 Enter Enter 248 I
110. Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 Number of Prompt reads Dimmers and press Select number of dimmers Enter then press ENTER 4 Press 8 0 0 to enter the Corner reads desired number of dim Dim 800 mers 5 Press Enter Number of dimmers is set to 800 Note If you increase the number of dimmers the additional dimmers are initially patched to channel zero From there you can assign them to the channel of your choice Setting number of channels Impression 2 allows you to control your dimmers with control channels Impression 2 defaults to 300 channels the maximum number of channels the console can address Follow these steps to select the number of channels Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 2 Number of Prompt reads Channels and press Select number of channels Enter then press ENTER 4 Press 4 5 to enter the Corner reads desired number of chan Chan 45 nels 5 Press Enter Number of channels is set to 45 Impression 2 user manual Setting default fade times chapter 3 system settings Impression 2 allows you to assign default upfade and downfade times to cues or to control fade times manually Default fade times are five sec onds Fade times may be expressed in Minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade tim
111. Split 64 Times 63 159 Type 56 154 Fade time effect 150 Fader Back 103 311 Clear 99 313 Default Clear Time 18 Display 9 320 Go 102 321 Hold 102 323 Manual 104 Rate 332 Specifications 305 Status display 320 Timed 99 Flash 50 320 Flexichannel 10 22 173 321 Purge Flexi 10 49 Selecting channels 49 Update 10 Flip 45 47 321 Follow 66 67 321 343 Follow time 159 Format diskette 177 Full 50 321 G Go 102 321 Grandmaster 23 Group 107 322 Blind 111 Clear all 195 Copy 117 Copy to sub 139 Create 108 Create w Solo 109 Delete 117 Displaying 110 Group Editing mode 111 322 Group List 121 322 Group mode 111 322 Label 116 Load to sub 139 Modify cue or sub 119 Modifying 112 Naming 210 Only 120 Park 264 Print 184 Print group list 186 Range edit in Group List 77 Specifications 307 Update 114 Use cue or sub 118 351 H Help 3 322 Hide Labels 34 337 High levels 144 Highest level 3 Hold 102 322 Hold for Go subroutine 159 323 Home position 124 l In 144 In time 144 In Dwell Out 323 Independent 45 46 323 Independent channels 323 Infrared Remote Focus Unit IR FU 203 Enabling 297 Installing 297 Pinout 297 Inhibitive submaster 124 134 323 Input Output configuration 275 Insert Cue 75 Insert Event 324 Insert Step 324 Inserting cues 84 Inserting SMPTE events 249 Insert Program 324 Insert Replace 324 334 Installation 267 Alphanumeric keyboard 278 Designer s Worksheet 28
112. Thru 5 Selects submasters 1 through 5 Prompt reads Select submaster number s 3 Press Time and enter 5 Prompt reads Enter upfade time 4 Press Enter Sets upfade time for submasters 1 through 5 to five seconds Impression 2 user manual chapter 12 effects Grandmaster 100 Attributes Po Step Channel 1 Dwell Out 1 1 26 5 76 25005 0 2 gt gt gt gt c 7 gt O 0 2 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 DSI 0 2 i 02 1 4 1 0 0 0 0 5 Wait Link Comp lete 5 5 110 100 100 Cue Type Time Dwell Link Follow Rate 100 EF 0 Hold en 100 7 K E E An effect runs steps containing channels in a variety of patterns called chases An effect can be positive with lights starting off and being turned on in patterns or negative with lights starting on and being turned off in patterns Impression 2 allows you to record effects each with up to 100 steps into cues or submasters Each effect includes level and timing controls for the steps in the effect and overall timing controls for the effect itself Each effect step can last for up to 99 59 minutes Note Channel levels are not affected by an effect until a step runs that specifically addresses the channel This chapter includes the following sections e Steps e Creating steps e Configuring effects e Modifying effects e Running an effect cue e Using an effect submaster Steps An effect may consist of up to 100 steps A step is made up of elements El
113. UD Master iP a is dA o Blais a Cady 124 CHANGING VDE iii A A EE 125 submaster pag s s mit a td aa 126 Submaster LEDS uta ad bed Bed doa ts 127 Submaster bump buttons o oooooooooo ee 128 Recording SUDMaStErS seco maak er ee whe oe ne Bes 129 Fade and dwell times for submasters 129 Adding a rate to a submaster 00000e 132 Specifying a submaster S page n ananuna anaana 132 Using Except to record a submaster without another submaster s ChanelS o o o o o oooooooooooooo o 133 Creating inhibitive submasters 0 000 0002 134 Modifying submasters in Blind 0 0 0000 cee 135 Modifying submasters in Stage 0 000 000 135 Using Update to modify submasters 136 Live control of a submaster S rate 2 eee 137 Controlling submaster fades manually 137 Kabeling SubMaSters sen nauk be a Soe es 138 Copying submasters n n saaana aoaaa eee 138 Loading cues or groups to submasters 139 Copying cues or groups to submasters 139 Clearing SubMmasters ou seere or alee yd Olney he ee eee a ee 140 S bmaster Listean nr cect aat i cacao A e Re adas a 141 Impression 2 user manual Chapter 12 ETTOCES AS ic 143 SEPSA ras Cors Mn Ed dal E da ia SER a 144 Creating STPS cia da 145 Default element assignment 147 Controlling effects 2 eee 148 ATHIDUTES 2 s
114. Using cues or submasters as groups If you wish you can treat the channels recorded in a cue or a submaster as If they were a group bringing them up on stage or including them in other level setting operations For example to bring up a cue on stage as a group follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Group Tells Impression 2 to treat the next entry as a group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press Cue and enter the Prompt reads number of the cue you Group mode Select cue number to want to bring up use as group 4 Press At and enter the The cue s channels are brought up on level at which you wish to stage at the specified level bring the cue up Or press Prompt reads Full Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit To use a submaster as a group follow the same procedure but press Sub instead of Cue in step 3 Note You may not group the channels in a cue part only in a whole cue Note You may not group the channels in an effect cue or effect submaster Impression 2 user manual Using groups to modify cues or submasters in Blind You can use groups to modify cues or submasters For example let s say you have created a group 3 that contains channels 1 through 10 at a level of 75 percent Follow these steps to add group 3 to submaster 2 Keystrokes 1 Press Blind
115. V PVC The cable connector at the remote device will vary depending on the device itself Console connector DB 25 female Pin Function 1 Macro 1 901 2 Macro 1 902 3 Macro 1 903 4 Macro 1 904 5 Macro 1 905 6 Macro 1 906 7 Macro 1 907 8 Macro 1 908 9 not connected 10 Ground 11 12 Vdc 12 not connected 13 not connected 14 Macro 1 901 15 Macro 1 902 16 Macro 1 903 17 Macro 1 904 18 Macro 1 905 19 Macro 1 906 20 Macro 1 907 21 Macro 1 908 22 not connected 23 Ground 24 12 Vdc 25 not connected Remote connector Connector type depends on unit Impression 2 user manual Wiring remote macros There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Go function e Connect all Macro pins pins 1 8 to ground pin 10 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 14 21 to 12 Vdc pin 24 as shown in the following diagram 1 Macro 1 901 a 2 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 o 15 O 3 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 903 16 O A Macro 1 903 Macro 1 904 17 j p 5 Macro 1 904 Macro 1 905 180 lt 6 Macro 1 905 Macro 1 906 gt 7 Macro 1 906 Macro 1 907 DO gt 8 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 908 21 5 us Macro 1 908 not connected 22 t ted not connecte 10 Ground 23 a Ground 12 Vdc 11 24 12 Vd Cc t connected 12 no 25 t ted not connecte 9 13 not connected e Connect all Macro pins pins 14 21 to the 12 Vdc pin pin 24 and switch
116. abel Act 1 1 Enter names cue 6 Act 1 1 Label Label is softkey S3 in the Channel Attributes display and S5 in the Real Time Programs display Use S3 or S5 Label to assign a label to a channel or a program Last Page Last Page is softkey S4 in many displays Press S4 Last Page to go backward one display page After software version 1 8 this key is renamed Previous Page Learn Macro Impression 2 s Learn function allows you to create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes Impression 2 records the keystrokes you execute in a macro The recorded keystroke sequence can then be rerun by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit the sequence in Macro mode to adjust its oper ation Example Learn M3 Enter starts the macro Learn process for macro 3 Learn mode SMPTE Learn Mode is softkey S6 in the SMPTE Events display Use S6 Learn Mode to record SMPTE events from the fader Go keys the submaster bump buttons or the macro keys To insert an event time only go to SMPTE display mode and press Record Press S6 again to turn off Learn mode Learned events will not be sorted and permanently stored until Learn mode is turned off appendix d reference 325 Left Arrow Use to move through various displays including Stage Blind effects subroutines and macros Level Use Levell to immediately set channels and groups to the default
117. ackout cue make the blackout cue an allfade cue An allfade cue assigns a level of zero to any unused channels This blocks any potential tracks An allfade cue also clears the opposite fader Figure 6 displays what happens when we track channel 5 through the sequence when cue 5 is a regular crossfade cue Chan 1 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 Cue 2 50 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 25 Cue 5 00 Figure 6 Channel 5 tracks through cue 5 and ruins the blackout cue Chan 2 FF FF FF 00 Chan 3 FF FF 00 Chan 4 50 00 FF 00 Chan 5 FF FF FF FF FF FF Impression 2 user manual chapter 7 track If cue 5 is an allfade Impression 2 records all unused channels at 00 per cent In the example below an allfade enters 00 in channel 5 cue 5 When you track channel 5 through the sequence it won t track through the blackout cue To select the allfade type for cue 5 enter these keystrokes Blind Cue 5 Type 2 Selects allfade fade type Record 5 Enter Re records cue Now when we track channel 5 through the sequence cue 5 blocks the track The result is illustrated in Figure 7 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 FF Cue 1 1 50 50 FF Cue 2 50 FF 00 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 7 For more information on cue fade types see Cue types on page 56 87 Tracksheet Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the ne
118. acros Prompt reads Enter Press ENTER to print all macros or select 1st macro number to print 2 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads the first macro in the range Press ENTER to print macro or you wish to print Press select last macro number to print Enter 3 Use the keypad to enter File sent to the printer the last macro in the range you wish to print Press Enter Impression 2 user manual Patch Print Patch prints the current dimmer to channel patch To print a full patch report follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 9 Print Patch Prompt reads Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation Channel Attributes Print Channel Attributes prints a list of channel attributes recorded in the currently loaded show To print a full list of channel attributes follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup Menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 1 1 Print Channel Prompt reads Attributes Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation chapter 16 printing 189 Real Time Programs Print Real Time Programs prints a li
119. actual control channel It functions as a holding area in which you may store dimmers not included in your patch Before you begin creating a custom patch you may find it helpful to assign all dim mers to channel zero Then when you begin patching you can select dim mers from channel zero and patch them to channels as you like Dimmers assigned to channel zero are listed at the end of channel list under These dimmers are not assigned to any channel but remain on the patch screen Follow these steps to assign dimmers to channel zero in By Dimmer mode Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 Ifthe Dim LED is unlit press Dim to indicate that the next number entered will be a dimmer 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer 4 Press S6 Unpatch Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Selected dimmers are unpatched and assigned to channel zero 33 34 Labeling dimmers Impression 2 allows you to assign alphanumeric labels to your dimmers Dimmer labels may be up to five characters long and may consist of any combination o
120. ade times Impression 2 user manual Modifying submasters in Blind To modify a submaster in Blind follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 1 3 Press Enter B 6 Enter channel numbers and set desired new levels Press Record Press Enter Actions Selects Blind display Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Brings up current level settings for submaster 1 Prompt reads Select channel numbers Sets new levels Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Changes to submaster 1 are recorded Modifying submasters in Stage To modify a submaster in Stage follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 chapter 11 submasters Press Stage Use the submaster slider to raise submaster 2 to full on stage Enter channel numbers and set desired new lev els Press Record then press submaster 2 s bump but ton Press Rel Slide submaster slider to zero then back to full Actions Selects Stage display Submaster 2 s channels rise on stage to recorded levels New levels are set on stage Submaster 2 is recorded with the new levels Submaster LED blinks indicating that submaster 2 has been changed and the changes have not been loaded Releases newly set levels Loads submaster 2 s new levels and brings them up on stage 135 Using Update to modify submaster
121. al Setup The Setup display allows you to access system setting information print and disk functions and macro editing as well as optional control informa tion Menu 11 The Garden Plot Memory left 82 System Settin Input Output If iguration Disk Functi NOOAWN sheet Editing diting ETCLink Functions 8 9 Channel Attributes Real Time Programs SMPTE Events 13 May 96 Impression 2 Version 2 0 s2 3 84 85 S6 8 8 Set Name Clock Sheet Sliders Console Sliders Sheet Sliders Console Sliders is softkey S1 in the Designer s Worksheet Setup display Use S1 Sheet Sliders Console Sliders to enable either the sliders on the console or the sliders on the Designer s Worksheet Show Hide Labels Show Hide Labels is softkey S8 in the Patch display Press S8 Show Labels in Patch mode to display or hide the alphanu meric dimmer labels Show Name Show Name is softkey S1 in the Setup display Press S1 Show Name to label the show in memory using the alphanu meric keyboard The show name will be stored with the show when writ ten to disk SMPTE Time SMPTE Time is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Dimmer Status display Use S2 SMPTE Time to access the time field in the SMPTE Events dis play appendix d reference 337 Sneak Sneak is softkey S1 in the Stage display Use Sneak to return modified channels to the level provided by the faders or submasters Channels will
122. al events manually Note As you play back SMPTE programs you may find it useful to display the SMPTE event list on the playback display To do so press Setup 6 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter External SMPTE source Once you have recorded a series of cues in a SMPTE program the con sole automatically runs the program in response to SMPTE time code To run the SMPTE program start the flow of external SMPTE data Before you start SMPTE flow you must enable the SMPTE port To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 6 Options Set Selects Options Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Press 5 SMPTE Input Prompt reads Enter Enable disable external SMPTE input 1 Enable 2 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter External SMPTE is enabled When the console detects SMPTE data it will automatically run the SMPTE program If external data is not detected and the internal clock is disabled the message Waiting for input appears above the SMPTE list 254 Impression 2 user manual Internal SMPTE clock chapter 20 control interfaces To run the SMPTE program using the internal clock follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Press S1 Internal Clock Use the keypad or the and keys to enter the SMPTE time of the first event you want to view or enter zero to start at the beginni
123. ample S6 Delete Cue 6 Enter Enter deletes cue 6 Example S6 Delete Cue Enter Enter deletes the selected cue appendix d reference 315 Delete Entry Delete Entry is softkey S3 in the Macro Editing and Designer s Worksheet display Use S3 Delete Entry to clear a button entry from a macro Use the left and right arrow keys to move to the required entry When selected it will be highlighted in yellow Press S3 to clear the entry Delete Event Delete Event is softkey S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S6 Delete Event to delete SMPTE events from the event list Delete Group Delete Group is softkey S6 in the Blind Group displays Press S6 Delete Group to delete the contents of a selected or specified group Example Delete Group 6 Enter Enter deletes group 6 Example Delete Group Enter Enter deletes the selected group Delete Macro Delete Macro is softkey S6 in the Macro Editing display Use S6 Delete Macro to remove all recorded information from a macro Example S6 Delete Macro 3 Enter Enter erases the contents of macro 3 Delete Part Delete Part is softke y S6 in the Blind Multipart display Press S6 Delete Part to delete one part of a selected or specified mul tipart cue Example S6 Delete Part 6 Enter Enter deletes part 6 Example S6 Delete Part Enter Enter deletes the selected part Delete Program D
124. an modify selected channels with Full At or the fader wheel Selected channels are displayed in yellow and their levels are red on white You can select channels in all display modes Selected captured channels are live channels that are under immediate keypad control Channels can be selected and captured only in Stage modes You can select channels in Blind but they won t be captured since Blind mode is not live Press Rel once to release selected channels Recorded channels Recorded channels are channel levels that have been recorded in a cue group or submaster In Stage mode recorded levels are displayed in green or magenta Recorded channels may be either moving or tracked in Blind mode see below Channel levels controlled by effects are displayed in white Channel levels controlled by submasters other than effect sub masters are displayed in yellow Moving channels Moving channels are channel levels that change from one cue to the next In Stage mode all moving channels are displayed in green In Blind and Tracksheet moving channels are displayed in green if they are moving down or blue if they are moving up Tracked channels A tracked channel is a channel whose level is unchanged from the preced ing cue Tracked channels are displayed in magenta Impression 2 user manual Channel Attributes display The Channel Attributes display allows you to assign attributes to specific channels including
125. annels 1 and 4 at 45 per cent Attribute Attribute is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Effect display Use S8 Attribute to access the effect attribute selection softkeys Impression 2 user manual B B is softkey S3 in the Patch Park and ETCLink Functions displays S6 B allows selection of the B output of a multiplex dimmer Example Patch Dimmer 1 S6 B At 7115 gives the B half of multi plex dimmer 1 a patch level of 75 percent Back Use Back to replace the cue in the fader with the previous cue Blackout Press Blackout to reduce all channel outputs on stage to zero Press Blackout again to restore lights Independent channels are not affected by Blackout Blind The Blind display allows you to create and modify cues groups and sub masters without affecting current live levels Blind also allows you to create effects and subroutines Bounce effect Bounce is softkey S4 in the attribute list of the Effect display Use S4 Bounce to create an effect that alternates between a forward chase and a reverse chase If the effect is not assigned the reverse attribute the first pass will be forward the second reverse the third for ward etc If the effect is assigned the reverse attribute the first pass will be reverse the second forward etc To cancel the Bounce attribute press S4 again Bounce subroutine The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Bounc
126. arity Up Off Down On 289 290 Installing Remote Interfaces Remote Interfaces allow you to attach Expression peripherals to your net work Each Remote Interface contains connectors for three types of net work cable ThinNet ThickNet and Twisted Pair Choose the connector that matches your cable type To install the Remote Interface follow these steps 1 Plug the network connector into the appropriate back panel connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet The Remote Interface back panel contains connectors for up to two mon itors the connector labeled CRT 1 is active three DMX512 outputs and an RFU The illustration below shows the Remote Interface s back panel and indicates the connector used by each accessory The front panel includes a connector for a digitizer and an alphanumeric keyboard switched outlets He 6 26A sb 120 VAC 50 60H2 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc 6 26Asb 120 VAC 50 60 Hz o E D ES ETCNet manufactured by optional 1 0 DMX out parallel port RFU 1512 513 1024 1025 1536 parallel printer i USH us Fy Pushy USH Middleton WI USA Oy o Ja P sad A O O O O ay 3 CRT2 3 deo rr In order to activate the Remote Interface you must first adjust the set tings of a number of DIP switches on the Remote Interface s main circui
127. assigned to part 8 automatically As channels are assigned to new parts they are deleted from part 8 automatically Press Channel 1 Thru 2 0 Full Record 1 Enter This creates a standard cue 1 containing channels 1 through 20 at Full The following example divides this cue into four parts numbered 1 2 3 and 8 each containing five of the channels in the original cue Press Stage to return and continue Follow these steps to convert a standard cue to a multipart cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue 1 Selects cue 1 3 Press Channel 1 Thru Creates part 1 Places channels 1 5 Record Part 1 through 5 in part 1 Remaining Enter channels are placed in part 8 4 Press Channel 6 Thru Creates part 2 Moves channels 6 1 0 Record Part 2 through 10 from part 8 to part 2 Enter 5 Press Channel 1 1 Creates part 3 Moves channels 11 Thru 1 5 Record Part through 15 from part 8 to part 3 Part 8 3 Enter contains channels 16 through 20 Note When a normal cue is split into a multipart cue all of the channels assigned to that cue are placed in part 8 initially From part 8 they are moved to any one of the other seven parts When all of the channels are assigned to a part part 8 is deleted automatically 93 Wait times in multipart cues You can set individual wait times of up to 99 59 Minutes for each part of a multipa
128. at when the submaster is full channel 1 is at 50 percent The console will not allow you to update a channel in a submaster to a level higher than the level to which the submaster slider is set 136 Impression 2 user manual Live control of a submaster s rate In Stage mode selecting a submaster and pressing S3 Rate allows the timing of the submaster to be controlled by the rate wheel or keyboard entry Follow these steps to change the rate of an active submaster in Stage This procedure also works if the submaster is not active In either case the new rate is automatically recorded in the submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 Press Sub 5 Selects submaster 5 3 Press S3 Rate Activates rate control Prompt reads Select submaster rate and press ENTER or use wheel or trackpad to alter rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Move Rate wheel Sets and records fade rate for submaster 5 If submaster is running fade proceeds at new rate Note When the submaster rate is controlled by the rate wheel the sub master s number turns blue on the Submaster List Controlling submaster fades manually When you press the bump button on a timed submaster recorded fade times play back as you recorded them Impression 2 allows you to use the slider to take manual control of submasters recorded with fade times The Submaster List shows the progress of the submaster s fade To over ride the
129. ate in your system follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press S2 Set Clock The following screen appears 3 Enter the current time in New time appears on screen hours and minutes Time entry format corresponds to your clock mode setting in System Settings In 24 hour format 930 9 30 AM 1625 4 25 PM In 12 hour format use to select AM or PM 4 Press Enter Time is set Date is highlighted Enter the day of the month New date is set Month is highlighted 1 31 and press Enter 6 Enter the month 1 12 and New month is set Year is highlighted press Enter 7 Enter the year 00 99 and New year is set Day is highlighted press Enter 8 Enter the day of the week New day is set Time is highlighted 1 7 and press Enter 9 Press Record to reset Returns to Setup display Real Time Clock with the new settings Note You may use and to scroll through the options in any of the fields on this screen 26 Impression 2 user manual Naming show chapter 3 system settings You can use an alphanumeric keyboard to name the show currently loaded in the console The names you give shows can consist of letters numbers or the symbols amp _ L as well as the comma and period You may enter the name using overwrite or insert mode In overwrite you type over any previously entered characters in insert mode each new characte
130. back in a fader See Chapter 9 Playing back cues for instructions To view a cue only on the screen select Blind mode and enter the desired cue number To view a different cue press Cue and the new cue number that you want to see In Blind mode you can also use and to move through recorded cues and cue parts one at a time Press Cue then press to display the next cue or part press to display the previous cue or part Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Working with cues in Stage mode Stage mode display appears on the Command display monitor A sample Stage mode display is shown below Grandmaster 100 11 P 03 04 0 07 08 09 10 011 1 3 5 016 17 18 38 39 40 041 42 43 44 45 046 47 48 53 54 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 066 67 68 70 071 72 73 74 77 78 79 80 081 82 B4 5 086 87 88 89 90 92 93 94 95 096 97 03 04 05 106 07 08 Cue C ype 2 Wait Link Follow Rate 1 9 4 2 t10 6 Ox Toad enters Follow 1 Follow 5 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 110 5 2 XF 5 t10 6 Mist on Garden Toad enters 5 5 110 1 Sneok pdo Rate Softkeys Flash The examples in this chapter demonstrate how to create a variety of cues in Stage display mode Cues consist of channel levels and cue attributes Each example in the text illustrates a different cue attribute However multiple attributes can be applied to one cue 59 60 Recording a cue in Stage In this cue you will only set channel levels
131. bute range editing Subroutines Group functions e Up to 500 groups e Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group e Group labels Diskette drive e 3 5 inch high density diskette drive for show storage e One show per diskette e Software updates installed through diskette drive Macro functions Up to 2 000 macro selections for programming Macros may activate any key on the console Live Learn mode Blind editing Macros programmable for Macro wait Real Time Clock event programming Powerup macro Remote Trigger function Effects functions Up to 100 steps each Variability of rate during playback Step times In Dwell Out Step fade times High Low Levels In Dwell Out Effect fade time Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters Range editing of effect attributes and step values Profile functions e Ten preset profiles e Profiles may be assigned to dimmers Level wheel e Proportional intensity control of channels or groups e Proportional rate control of cues and submasters from zero to 2 000 percent appendix c specifications 307 308 Options Parallel printer Alphanumeric keyboard Remote Focus Unit Infrared Remote Focus Unit Designer s Worksheet Lighting Playback Controller Remote VGA monitors Remote Interface Remote Macros Dimmer feedback Size and weight e 40x 16 5 x 6 5 inches e 50 pounds Impression 2 user manual appendix d reference This appendix lists most Impression 2 functions
132. can be set to operate in full display mode or in Flexichannel mode In full display mode channel displays show all channels and their current status In Flexichannel mode indepen dent flipped and linked channels and channels with a recorded level appear Impression 2 defaults to full channel display Flexichannel may be enabled or disabled from the System Settings Menu Flip Flip is softkey S2 in the Channel Attributes display Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play See Flipped channels for more information Flipped channels The Flip command in the Channel Attributes display inverts the output of the channel to which it is applied A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play Channel control can be flipped this inverts the level sent to the chan nel Use Flip to control moving lights Link the channels that control the pan attribute for moving lights on opposite sides of the stage and Flip one of the two channels When you control the two lights their movements are mirrored rather than parallel Follow Follow allows you to play a series of cues automatically The Follow time indicates how long the console waits af
133. channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 e To exclude channels from a selected group of consecutively num bered channels enter the first channel press Thru enter the last channel then press Except and enter the channels to leave out For example Channel 1 Thru 1115 Except 5 Thru 1113 selects channels 1 2 3 4 14 and 15 e Use And Except and Thru to select multiple non consecutive groups of channels For example Channel 1 Thru 5 And 8 Thru 1112 Except 9 selects channels 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 11 and 12 Hint If no channels are selected press Enter to select all channels cur rently at a level above zero Once you have entered your channel selections you are ready to set chan nel levels Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode In Flexichannel mode only channels that are used in the show appear on the Stage Blind and Fader displays When Flexichannel mode is enabled the Thru key functions slightly differently For example in normal mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all channels from 1 to 5 In Flexichannel mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all visible channels from 1 to 5 To select all channels from 1 to 5 including channels that haven t been used in the show so far press 1 Thru Thru 5 Pressing Thru a second time alerts the system to ignore Flexichannel for that channel selection Note When channels that were used in a show are removed from the
134. corded cue live e Modifying cue attributes e Using Update to modify a cue e Deleting cues e Copying cues e Inserting cues e Cue List 56 Cue types Typel displays the fade type options described below The menu that appears in Stage omits the effect and subroutine options Effects and sub routines are explained in their own chapters To select a cue fade type in Stage Blind or Fader modes press Type and enter an option number If you change a cue s fade type you must re record the cue For example Cue 2 Type 2 Record Enter records cue 2 with an allfade If you do not enter a fade type cues default to crossfade Crossfade In a crossfade cue channel levels that increase fade to their new level in the assigned upfade time Channel levels that decrease fade to their new level in the assigned downfade time The cue starts when you press Go You may use a wait time to delay the start of the upfade or downfade Allfade An allfade cue forces all unused channels to zero intensity when you press Go and clears the other fader Allfade is useful for forcing an end cue when tracking channels For more information on using allfade cues for tracking see Chapter 7 Track Subroutine A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that you have more playback options For more information on using subroutines see Chapter 13 Worki
135. cue in Stage mode Keystrokes T 2 Press Stage Press Cue enter cue number and press Go Modify channel levels as desired Press S2 Update If you wish to update the levels in a cue other than the active cue enter the desired cue number To record changes only to channels that are already in the cue press Only Press Enter Or Press Track Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue bringing up its current levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in cue Limits update to channels in cue Updates and re records the active cue Note Press Track after you press S2 Update if you wish changes to track into subsequent cues 71 72 Using Update to add channels to a cue Normally when you re record a cue you record all the channel levels cur rently on stage Impression 2 s Update feature allows you to record only those channels that you specify This allows you to add specific channels to the active cue then re record the cue without recording the entire stage look Follow these steps to use Update to modify a cue in Stage mode Keystrokes 1 Zi Press Stage Press Cue enter cue number and press Go Modify or add channel levels as desired Press S2 Update If you wish to update the levels in a cue othe
136. d Selects display mode 2 Press Cue Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 3 Press 4 Selects cue 4 Corner reads Cue 4 4 Press Timel Prompt reads Enter upfade time 5 Press 1 01 Enters an upfade time of ten seconds Corner reads UpTime 10 6 Press Enter Prompt reads Enter downfade time 7 Press 1 5 Enters a downfade time of 15 seconds Corner reads DnTime 15 8 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 9 Press Enter Records cue 4 with upfade time of ten seconds and downfade time of 15 seconds Note If the cue already exists you may omit steps 8 and 9 Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Recording a cue with a wait time Wait time is the time that elapses between when you press Go and when the actual fade begins You can record Impression 2 cues with a wait time of up to 99 59 minutes Impression 2 allows you to program a wait time for either the upfade or the downfade not both If you do not enter a wait time Impression 2 assigns the cue a wait time of zero Follow these steps to record a cue with a downfade wait time Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue Press 5 Press Wait once O a Press Wait twice 5 Press 6 6 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 5 Prompt read
137. d or Off Open 293 RVI ETCNet DIP switch settings In order to enable the Remote Video Interface RVI for use on the ETCNet network you must first adjust the settings of the two sets of ETCNet DIP switches You will need to use a pin or a similar fine pointed object to set the switches To set the switches follow these steps 1 Locate the two sets of DIP switches visible through the right side panel of the RVI 2 If the ETCNet cable is plugged into the BNC ThinNet connector set the back six DIP switches to Off up Set the front six to On down 3 If the ETCNet cable is plugged into the RJ45 Twisted Pair connector or the DB15 ThickNet connector set the front six switches to Off up Set the back six to On down Front Back O O o 12 3456 11123456 0 294 Impression 2 user manual Installing remote unit software appendix a installation Follow these steps to upgrade software for any Remote Interfaces or Remote Video Interfaces connected to your Expression control console via the ETCNet network This will not upgrade software for a Remote Focus Unit RFU 1 Installing a new version of Remote Unit software will not clear system memory but it is always best to be prepared Save your cur rent show 2 Turn the console off 3 Insert the Remote Unit Update software diskette into your console s diskette
138. d Label which apply only to the overall cue You may record a cue as a multipart cue or record it as a standard one part cue and split it later Each part of a multipart cue may consist of any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part of a multipart cue If you record a channel in a part and that channel is already included in another part the channel will be placed in the new part and be removed from the older part automatically Upfade and downfade wait times in multipart cues allow you to program fades that do not start immediately when you play the multipart cue When you press Go to start a multipart cue some parts may start imme diately and others may start up to 99 59 minutes later depending on the assigned wait time The total duration of a multipart cue is equal to the combined wait and fade times of the longest part Note Multipart cues can be recorded in either Stage or Blind mode Multipart cues are stored like normal cues in the console s memory and on disk This chapter includes the following sections e Recording a multipart cue e Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue e Wait times in multipart cues e Editing a multipart cue 92 Recording a multipart cue Follow these steps to record a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stagel Press Channell select channels and enter chan nel levels then press Enter For example Channel 1 Thru 5 Full
139. d as two digit numbers e g 20 for 20 percent 05 for five percent Use Full for 100 percent Fade times Upfade times may range from 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes If you do not enter a time the downfade will match the upfade Follow time is the time between the start of one step and the start of the next Follow times may range from 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes chapter 13 subroutines 159 160 Creating subroutines Each subroutine can hold up to 100 steps Each step lists a cue or a style To create a subroutine follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Create the cues you want to use in your subroutine Press Blind You must be in Blind mode to create subrou tines Press Cue 7 Press Type Press 4 Subroutine Impression 2 displays the screen illustrated below andmas ter 100 Cu e 7 Step Subroutine Type T ime SR Subrout ine 6 Press 1 gt 7 Press 1 8 Press 1 Action Displays Blind mode screen Selects cue 7 to be your subroutine cue Displays fade type menu Prompt reads Select fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect or 4 Subroutine Select subroutine fade type Prompt reads Select step number s then press ENTER Wait Link Follow Rate 110 Gunshot Selects step 1 Prompt reads Enter cue number to fade or press STYLE to change step type Selects cue 1 for step 1 of the subroutine Prompt reads Enter type of cue
140. d playing acue 2 0 ee 102 AO Bs oer a e o ook ace ate e O 102 HOla iaa tina le dia va td od 102 A IIA A A A 103 Goto differentiere s DERE dnde 103 Controlling fades manually o o oooooooooooooooo 104 Manual override o o oo oooooooooo eee eee 104 ELCANO AA Med o b aks abe 105 QUIGKStED varita e ke Ade 106 iil Chapter 10 CLOUDS di NAAA A a 107 Creating Groups Jue 6 Wek BIKE 2 et dl a o e 108 Creating a group from the look on stage 108 Creating a group using Solo 20 0 002 eee 109 Displaying groups ON stage ees 110 Working with groups in Blind 202200000 00 111 Group Mode oe nos dances A seca wn od eves wea 111 Group Editing mode aA ERR SE OE Aa 111 Modifying groupS 0 pa ce eee 112 IR BUR TE is a tt E gh A Nth tis 5 td E hues toate ed 112 AAA O Raed Bretagne glace lee Ops ote 113 Using Update to modify groups 0 000200 ee 114 EABGIING groups inaa tt Coie eed eh eens a 116 Deleting groups sac e Pa A eM Are da os a od a 117 COPYING GlOUDSe erne A we Mast VEL NES ges a 117 Using cues or submasters aS groups 20000 118 Using groups to modify cues or submasters in Blind 119 A IE lA hls A 120 Group SEI Aa E sa 121 Chapter 11 Submasters ies at eat 123 SuUbmaster types ss atin cot oh atte be edad eae odes 124 Pile on submaster en ne eee 124 Inhibitive SUDMASTER es 4 eed A heel Aaa bodes a 124 EMecES
141. d to single channels but only one channel may be patched to a dimmer Hint If you use the same patch for several shows create the patch and record it on a disk before you record any cues Label the disk Standard patch When you start your next show read the Standard patch show into the console then begin writing cues to avoid reentering the patch Impression 2 user manual Patching dimmers to channels chapter 4 patch Follow these steps to patch a dimmer s to a control channel Keystrokes I 2 Press Patch Press Dim If the LED in the Dim key is lit you may omit this step Use the keypad to enter the numbers of the dim mers you want to patch Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer Press Enter Enter the channel number to which you want to patch the selected dimmers and press Enter Repeat steps 2 through 4 to patch additional dim mers Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads To assign dimmers select channel number then press ENTER To delete dimmers press UNPATCH Dimmer s are patched to the channel 31 32 Proportional patching Impression 2 allows you to proportionally inhibit the output of individual dimmer levels from the Patch display Dimmers output at 100 percent unless you patch
142. day Thursday and Friday Impression 2 user manual Editing real time programs Once you have created a real time program you can easily make changes in the Real Time Programs display Press gt IN or N to move the highlight When you reach the right end of a line press gt to move to the next line When you reach the last line press I and enter a time to add a new program Deleting real time programs To delete real time programs follow these steps Note The Clear Real Time Programs menu option on the Clear menu allows you to delete all recorded programs Keystrokes 1 2 3 5 Press Setup Press 1112 Enter Press S6 Delete Program Press 5 And 6 Enter Press Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 5 and 6 to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes programs 5 and 6 Inserting real time programs Keystrokes 1 2 3 chapter 20 control interfaces Press Setup Press 1 2 Enter Press S7 More Softkeys S1 Insert Program Press 4 Enter Press 2 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects program 4 to inser
143. deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages See Disabling second ary messages on page 226 for more information Fatal messages appendix b error messages Dimmer ff has shut down due to an overtemperature condition The dimmer will remain shut down until the condition is cleared at the dimmer rack Use Dimmer Status to determine the rack number for the dimmer Rack if DMX port A B failure Either there is a problem with the DMX cabling connections between the console and the rack or the rack has been configured incorrectly Rack A B C phase input main voltage is in error at V Rack input main frequency is out of spec at Hz Rack ff has shut down due to fan failure or other interruption of air flow Please check the rack looking for dirty air filters blocked air passages or fan failure ETCLink has failed Please check cabling and connections If the prob lem persists please call a qualified service technician Rack processor error 303 Secondary Messages Dimmer ff has a load but the recorded load is zero Because the recorded load is zero the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine whether the dimmer has a load error The load on dimmer ff has changed Because the dimmer output is not at a high enough level
144. ded in faders one cue per fader a submaster bump button and a macro The event is programmed to play back at a specified SMPTE time SMPTE times are expressed in hours minutes seconds and frames Thirty frames equal one second For example 00 25 30 17 is twenty five minutes thirty seconds and seventeen frames Up to 32 events may be assigned to the same SMPTE time Note You may change the number of frames per second to 24 or 25 in the Options Settings menu The Reset Loop time allows you to set when the SMPTE program loop repeats The Reset Loop time can be changed at any time but you will most often set it when you are creating or editing your SMPTE program If you purchase the external SMPTE option the system will run recorded SMPTE events in response to SMPTE time code it receives from an exter nal source If the flow of SMPTE data to the system is interrupted the internal clock takes over and begins to generate its own time code This allows the SMPTE program to continue to run even if the flow of external SMPTE data is stopped Contact ETC for more information about this option Note SMPTE must be enabled on your console before you can create or run SMPTE programs This requires setting DIP switch 4 to On See page 287 for more details 241 Enabling SMPTE input Before you can run SMPTE programs driven by an external SMPTE time source you must enable the SMPTE port To enable the SMPTE port follow these steps Key
145. der beginning with the last recorded step To cancel the reverse attribute press S3 again Right Arrow Press gt to move through various displays such as Stage Blind effects and macro mode Select Cue Select Cue is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Press S3 Select Cue to create or edit a fade step in a subroutine cue Select Dimmer Select Dimmer is softkey S5 in the Dimmer Status display Use S5 Select Dimmer to select a specific dimmer on the Dimmer Status display Select Event Select Event is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the Dimmer Status display Use S1 Select Event to select a SMPTE event or a range of SMPTE events for modification Select Fader Select Fader is softkey S1 in the Fader display Press S1 Select Fader to view the live output levels of the cues in the A B fader the C D fader both faders or the DMX In levels Select Group Select Group is softkey S1 in the Blind Group display Use S1 Select Group to specify which group to edit or view Example Blind Group S1 Select Group 6 Enter brings up group 6 for editing Select Macro Select Macro is softkey S1 in the Macro Editing display Use S1 Select Macro to access a macro for recording or editing Example S1 Select Macro 6 Enter selects macro 6 appendix d reference 335 Select Program Select Program is softkey S1 in the Real Time Pr
146. dicates how long the console waits after the cue starts before the next cue runs Follow plays back the next cue on the Cue List unless you use Link to specify a different sequence Follow times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds up to 99 59 minutes Follow these steps to record a cue with Follow Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue 7 Selects cue 7 3 Press Follow Prompt reads Enter follow time or press ENTER to confirm default time 4 Press 5 Enter Records cue 7 with a Follow time of five seconds After you start cue 7 the next cue in the Cue List plays automatically five seconds later Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Combining Link and Follow to create playback loops Impression 2 allows you to use Link and Follow to create cue playback sequences in which a group of cues plays back automatically and repeats Follow these steps to create a five cue sequence Keystrokes 1 Create five cues numbered 1 2 3 4 and 5 Press Cuel then press 1 the number of the first cue you want to include in the playback loop Press Follow 5 Enter Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cues 2 through 5 Press Cuel then press 5 the number of the last cue in the playback loop Press Link then press 1 the number of the first cue in the playback loop Press Enter Action Cue list displays cues 1
147. difications affect the look on stage If you record the cue with a new number modifications are not reflected in the fader you may want to run the cue through a fader before you release channels if you don t want to lose the look from stage Modifying cue attributes Follow these steps to modify cue attributes Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue then enter the number of the desired cue 3 Press the key that corre sponds to the attribute you want to modify Options include Type Time Wait Link Follow and Label 4 Enter the new setting for the attribute 5 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects the desired cue Modifies cue attribute Re records cue with modifications Note if you change the cue s type press Record Enter in step 5 Type changes will not take effect unless recorded Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Using Update to modify channels in a cue The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected cue You may record all levels on Stage into the cue or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the cue This allows you to modify the channel levels in the active cue then re record the cue without recording the entire stage look Note Levels provided by submasters aren t updated Only channel levels set on the keypad are recorded Follow these steps to use Update to modify a
148. display Selects cue or submaster 1 Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Or Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Prompt reads Select fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect or 4 Subroutine or Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect Identifies cue or submaster 1 as an effect Selects Effect display Prompt reads Select step numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step Prompt reads Select step time Prompt reads Enter step in time 145 146 10 11 12 13 14 15 Use the keypad to enter the In time then press gt Use the keypad to enter Dwell time then press gt l Use the keypad to enter Out time then press gt Use the keypad to enter the low level then press gt l Use the keypad to enter high level then press Enter Repeat steps 5 through 13 for each effect step you wish to create Press Record enter the cue or submaster number and press Enter Press Clear to cancel Prompt reads Enter step dwell time Prompt reads Enter step out time Prompt reads Select low level Prompt reads Enter high level Prompt reads Select step numbers Cue or submaster containing effect is recorded Impression 2 user manual chapter 12 effects Default element assignment
149. dix A I sta llation its E AAA ia 267 Impression 2 back panel 268 DIP switches and jumpers 0 0 0000 e eee 269 ECU arta see St ihe Se at ee ge oe a SNE ae 270 Main Processor Board RevisionOorB 270 Node Board Revision A 0 cc ee 271 Installing console and monitor 0 00 0 cee 272 Older console DIP switch settings 273 Connecting diner Se iia hed SAG he a Re rn OA 274 Replacing the auxiliary fuse 2 eee 274 System configurati sn ae teeth od once at 275 Setting DMX512 starting numbers 275 Setting Multiplex mode 0 000 cee eee 276 Setting DMX512 speed 0 eee 276 Updating Impression 2 software 2 2 0 0 eee 277 Installing an alohanumeric keyboard 278 Installing a pintem 0 etc eh Oe eR e AE Sue os 279 Installing Designer s WorkSheet o ooooooooooo oo 280 Installing the Kurta XGT 2 0 0 0 t Torena Ea eee 280 Installing the Kurta IS ONE 2 20 00 00 20 0000 ooo 282 Installing Remote Focus Unit 0 0 00 cee 284 Installing MIDs we has dato a Ae a a SA he 285 mataling SMPTE eo eee uE a new ee Pes 287 ETNIA A ERE DE e RE es e a 288 Installing Remote Interfaces o o oooooooooooo oo 290 Installing Remote Video Interface 292 Installing remote unit software 2 2 0 0 0000 295 Installing remote video monitors na
150. ds Sub 5 3 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter dwell time Press CLEAR for hold press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation 4 Press Clear Corner reads Dwell Hold 5 Press Enter Enter Dwell time is set to Hold for submaster 5 Manual dwell time If you record a submaster with a dwell time of manual and an upfade time other than zero the upfade starts when you press and hold the bump but ton It runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full as long as you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release it If you don t hold the bump button for the duration of the upfade time channels do not reach their full recorded levels Note If you do not enter a dwell time for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell To convert a timed dwell to a manual dwell in Blind mode follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 2 Press 5 Selects subMaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 3 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter dwell time Press CLEAR for hold press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation 4 Press Clear Clear Corner reads Dwell Man 5 Press Enter Enter Dwell time is set to Manual for submaster 5 chapter 17 submasters 131 132 Adding a rate to a submaster Rate allows you to record submasters that play back faster or slower than their recorded fade times This can be especia
151. e Proportion The dimmer s assigned proportional level e Profile The dimmer s assigned profile e Console dimmer level The dimmer output level the Impression 2 console is sending to the dimmer e Parked Whether or not the dimmer is parked Note Press Clear to remove the About window Impression 2 user manual chapter 4 patch About Dimmer with ETCLink If your console uses ETCLink to monitor dimmers in an ETC Sensor dim ming system the About Dimmer window displays additional dimmer monitoring information The following expanded About Dimmer window appears if dimmer monitoring is enabled About Dimmer 2 Label The dimmer s label Channel The channel to which the dimmer is assigned Proportion The dimmer s assigned proportional level Profile The dimmer s assigned profile Console dimmer level The dimmer output level the Impression 2 console is sending to the dimmer Parked Whether or not the dimmer is parked Rack Slot number The rack and slot in which this dimmer is located Rack dimmer level The actual output level at which the dimmer is set Dimmer level source The source of the control signal which set the dimmer s level Possible sources include DMX A DMX B Rack ff The following information is available on Sensor Advanced Features dim ming systems Recorded lamp load The load at which the selected dimmer was re corded Load at full The estimated load on the dimmer when the level is a
152. e console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channell the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Channel level display Level of channels in the selected cue group or submaster Fader status Indicates current status of both fader pairs Shows cue running in fader fade times percentage of completion and follow times Attribute bar Shows current settings for selected cue group or submaster Softkeys Blind functions for S1 through S8 Cue List Lists all cues along with their attributes The next cue in the cue list is yel low This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind Impression 2 user manual Fader The Fader display shows you only the levels on stage that have been set by the fader pairs Grandmaster Display mode Keypad corner Grandmaster 100 Fader 3 11 56 AM 001 02 03 04 05 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 Channel 26 27 28 29 30 031 32 33 34 35 036 37 38 39 40 041 42 43 44 45 level i Aa Ry i display 3 54 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 06 77 78 79 80 081 82 85 086 87 88 89 90 091 92 93 94 95 096 97 98 99 00 Prompt 3 04 05 106 07 08 area Fader Cue Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 22 22 D Dn 4 5 mo 5 status y r A 95 Mist on Garden Attribute bar chapter 2 monitor displays Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 6 PT 5
153. e limit link another macro to the end by entering its number as the last keystroke then enter the rest of your commands in the linked macro Macro Wait chapter 18 accessories To program a pause in the macro press Macro wait Impression 2 dis plays Mwait 0 Enter the length of the pause in minutes and seconds or as a fraction of a second in decimal form from 1 second to 99 59 minutes 207 Copying regions You may want to copy a region or use regions as building blocks for new regions To copy contents of one region to another follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 7 Designer Work Selects Macro display mode sheet Editing and press Prompt reads Enter Select region number or touch a previously defined region then touch ENTER 3 Press S7 Copy Region Prompt reads To copy region s select region number s to copy and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR 4 Press 2 Enter Prompt reads To copy selected region s select target region and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To copy selected macro s select target macro and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 2 5 the number of Corner reads Region 25 the new region 7 Press Enter Region copy is complete The contents of region 2 have been copied into region 25 Note In step 4 you may use And and Thru to enter multiple regions to copy If you
154. e step It then runs back through the steps in reverse order and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Bounce step enter the number of times you want the subroutine to bounce One bounce equals running through the sequence forward once and reverse once Enter 0 for a continuous bounce Build Build is softkey S5 in the attribute list of the Effect display Use S5 Build to cause each step in an effect to remain active until the entire step list is executed When the step list begins again all steps go out and the cycle begins again To cancel the Build attribute press S5 again appendix d reference 311 Bump SMPTE Bump is softkey S5 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S5 Bump to access the submaster bump field in the SMPTE Events display Bump Status Bump Status is softkey S1 in the Blind Submaster displays Use S1 Bump Status to change the function of the submaster bump button Choices are enabled disabled or solo Example S1 Bump Status 2 Enter disables the bump button of the selected submaster Calibrate Calibrate is a region on the Designer s Worksheet Whenever you install a new template on the digitizer tablet use Calibrate to line up the keys and regions correctly Using the digitizer pen touch the region labeled Calibrate or touch F1 Then follow the directions on the screen that instruct you to touch the pen to the r
155. eating and editing real time programs See System Set tings for instructions on setting the real time clock Real time programs The system will run recorded macros at specific times on specified days Real time programs must be enabled before they will function Enabling real time programs To enable or disable real time programs follow these steps Default is enabled Keystrokes 1 z 3 4 Press Setup Press 6 Enter Press 1 1 Enter Press 1 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Options Settings menu Selects Real Time Programs Prompt reads Enable Disable real time programs 1 enable 0 disable Enables Real Time Programs Note To disable Real Time programs repeat procedure and enter zero in step 4 Creating real time programs Follow these steps to create a real time program Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press Setup Press 1 2 Enter Press S1 Select Pro gram 1 Enter Press 8 0 0 Enter Press 1 And 3 Thru 5 Enter Press 5 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Enter time 12 hour clock Press to enter AM or PM Enters time to run macro Prompt reads Enter days of week 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 7 Sun Enters days to run macro Prompt reads Enter macro number Creates real time program 1 Macro 5 will run at 8 AM every Monday Wednes
156. ed show from inadvertent changes To disable the Record function in your system follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 3 Record Lock out 4 Press 1 Enter to lock out the record function Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Menu indicates current status of Record Lockout Prompt reads Enable Disable record lockout 1 Enable 0 Disable Record is locked out If you attempt to record anything the prompt reads Record is locked out Press CLEAR to continue Note As always the best way to safeguard your show is to make back ups See Chapter 17 Diskette functions for instructions on backing up a show to diskette Impression 2 user manual Enable disable Bump keys chapter 3 system settings Impression 2 s submaster bump buttons may be enabled or disabled Impression 2 defaults to enabled Follow these steps to enable or disable all submaster bump buttons Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 4 Bump keys Prompt reads and press Enter Enable disable bump keys 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 or 0 Corner reads BpStat 1 Or BpStat 0 5 Press Enter Submaster bump buttons are enabled or disabled 25 Setting clock To set the current time and d
157. eed additional information See Designer s Worksheet on page 205 for opera tion instructions Installing the Kurta XGT The Kurta XGT digitizer tablet is shipped with current Designer s Work sheet systems Follow these steps to install and configure your Kurta XGT Designer s Worksheet 1 Turn off your console or Remote Interface 2 Plug the 9 pin serial connector on the interface cable into the console or Remote Interface connector labeled Digitizer 3 Plug the other end of the interface cable into the interface connector on the back panel of the XGT There is a small arrow or dimple on the plug It should face up 4 Plug the transformer cable into the DC connector on the interface cable s serial connector plugged into the back panel of the console or Remote Interface 5 Plug the transformer into an electrical outlet or a surge protecting power strip 6 Turn on your console or Remote Interface The XGT also turns on The red power on LED in the back left corner should blink off and then on again If it doesn t check to be sure all cables are properly connected 7 The XGT shipped with a page of instructions called Configuring the Designer s Worksheet for use with Expression 2 line consoles Follow the instructions on that page now 8 The digitizer is now configured properly Remove the configuration page store it in a safe place and place one of the standard ETC tem plate sheets under the clear plastic flap on the
158. eflect the total number of available dimmers and channels See Chapter 3 Entering system settings on page 16 for information on setting the number of dim mers and channels This chapter includes the following sections e Selecting one to one patch e Creating custom patch e Proportional patching e Labeling dimmers e Assigning a profile to a dimmer e Capturing channels in Patch e Dimmer check e About Dimmer e Multiplexed dimmers e Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Selecting one to one patch The one to one patch assigns dimmer 1 to channel 1 dimmer 2 to channel 2 and so on If there are more dimmers than channels the one to one patch assigns the first extra dimmer to channel 1 the second extra dimmer to channel 2 and so on Follow these steps to select Impression 2 s default one to one patch Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup to display Selects Setup display the Setup Menu 2 Press 4 Clear Functions Prompt reads Enter Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Prompt reads 1 to 1 Enter To reset patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter to confirm Sets patch to default one to one patch your selection of one to one default patch or press Clear to cancel the operation Creating custom patch Impression 2 s custom patching capability allows you to create virtually any dimmer to channel configuration you like Groups of dimmers may be assigne
159. egions labeled A B and C Cancel Cancel is softkey S7 in the Load Management display Use S7 Cancel to interrupt a Record Loads operation that has already started Captured channels Captured channels are channels that you have selected and are live on stage They remain live until you press Rel to release them Captured channels override all other channel settings For example if a channel is in a fader at 100 percent and you capture it and set it to 50 percent Impression 2 sets the captured channel at 50 percent Press Rel twice to release captured channels Channel Use Channel to select a channel or group of channels Use of this key is often optional Example Channel 1 Thru 9 Except 4 At 7115 sets channels 1 through 3 and 5 through 9 to 75 percent Clear keypad Use Clear to clear the current keypad entry Press twice to clear all entries Example Channel 5 Clear 8 Enter selects channel 8 Impression 2 user manual Clear fader Use the fader Clear to clear a fader pair of any cues which have been assigned to it Also use Clear to initiate the downfade of an effect cue Clear Loads Clear Loads is softkey S6 in the Load Management display Use S6 Clear Loads to disable dimmer monitoring for selected dimmer loads Clear Region Clear Region is softkey S6 in the Designer s Worksheet Editing display Use S6 Clear Region to erase a recorded region Examp
160. elete Program is softkey S6 in the Real Time Programs display Use S6 Delete Program to remove a program from the program list All subsequent programs are renumbered Impression 2 user manual Delete Step Delete Step is softkey S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S6 Delete Step to delete the selected step or a specified step Example S6 Delete Step 4 Enter Enter deletes step 4 Example S6 Delete Step Enter Enter deletes the selected step Delete Sub Delete Sub is softkey S6 in the Blind Submaster and Sub List displays Use S6 Delete Sub to clear a suomaster of its recorded or loaded con tents Example S6 Delete Sub Enter Enter unloads the selected submas ter Example Sub List S6 Delete Sub 1 Thru 8 Enter Enter unloads subs 1 8 Dimmer Use Dim to start a dimmer check park a dimmer or to change dimmer patch assignments Example Dim 1 At Full Enter Example Park Dim 1 At 7 5 Example Patch Dim 6 Channel 7 Enter Dimmer Status Dimmer Status is softkey S5 in the System Status and Rack Status displays Use S5 Dimmer Status to Check information about your dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost Disable ETCLink Disable ETCLink is softkey S1 in the ETCLink Functions display Use S1
161. els or groups also known as elements A step may contain up to ten ele ments For example channels 1 through 10 would constitute ten ele ments filling the step However a group containing channels 1 through 10 would constitute only one element allowing nine more channels or groups to be added Each step in an effect is assigned a high and low level a step time and an in dwell and out time Steps subroutine All subroutine steps are either cue steps or style steps A cue step con tains an existing recorded cue The subroutine lets you change levels and fade rates for the cue step without changing the original cues A cue step may contain an effect cue A style step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback pattern This allows you to run loops run bounces pause the subroutine until you press go or end the subroutine and jump to any other cue Step Time Step Time is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect display Press S2 Step Time to access the Time field for the selected step s Step time is the time between the activation of the selected step and the next step Alternatively the arrow keys can be used to move through the display Example Step 5 S2 Step Time 2 Enter sets the step time of step 5 to 2 seconds Stop Printer Stop Printer is softkey S1 in the Print Functions display Press S1 Stop Printer to cancel a print function It may take a few
162. ements may be either channels or groups Each step may contain up to ten elements For example channels 1 through 10 would constitute ten elements filling the step However a group containing channels 1 through 10 would constitute only one element allowing nine more chan nels or groups to be added Each step in an effect is assigned a high and low level a step time and an in dwell and out time Step time Step time is the time between the beginning of a step and the beginning of the next step Default Step time is 0 2 seconds In time In a positive effect the time the step takes to fade from its starting level to its high level is the In time In a negative effect it is the time it takes to fade from its starting level to its low level Default In time is zero seconds Dwell time Dwell time is the length of time between the end of the In fade and the start of the Out fade Default Dwell time is zero Out time In a positive effect the time the step takes to fade from its high level to its low level is the Out time In a negative effect it is the time it takes the step to fade from its low level to its high level Default Out time is zero seconds Note If the In Dwell Out times are 0 0 0 the step will rise instantly to its High level and remain there until the Step time has elapsed Then it will drop instantly to its Low level High and Low levels The High and Low levels represent the range of levels channels in the step
163. en Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER Blank macro created Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros Enters setup display Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER Selects Write Show To Disk Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER Confirms selection Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER ENTER Stores macro 8 Impression 2 user manual chapter 14 macros Caution Impression 2 does not check the sequence of keystrokes to con firm that it will work It is possible to create macros that don t work When you run the macro you will receive whatever error messages are appro priate To avoid problems you should plan your macro before you start recording it by determining exactly what keystrokes you want to include You might want to do this by running through the task and writing down each key stroke Next macro When you press Enter Macro the Macro display selects the next macro If you wish to begin recording the next macro press Enter Macro wait To program a pause in the macro press Macro Wait at the point in the macro where you want the pause to occur Enter the time you would like the macro to hold then press Enter Continue to enter remaining macro commands Times may be expressed in Minutes and seconds or as fractions of sec onds in decimal format Times can be prog
164. er List chapter 16 printing Print Submaster List prints full information about all 240 submaster mem ories Submasters are listed by number Upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels are included in the printout To print a full submaster list printout follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setupl 2 Press 5 Print Functions Enter 3 Press 7 Print Submas ter List Enter 4 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer 187 188 Macros Print Macros prints a list of macro sequences recorded in the currently loaded show Macros are listed by number The printout provides com plete information about each macro and its keystrokes To print a full macro list follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 8 Print Macros Prompt reads Enter Press ENTER to print all macros or select 1st macro number to print 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation To print a partial macro list from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press 8 Print M
165. er and before you press Enter This removes channels from subsequent cues if they track from this cue part Impression 2 user manual Adding deleting and modifying channels Follow these steps to edit channels in a multipart cue chapter 8 multipart cues Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Enter the cue number Press Part then press or until the desired part is displayed Press Channel and select the desired chan nels Set channel levels Use At the fader wheel Full or Level or and Press At Clear to delete the channels Press Record Enter Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Select part number Prompt reads Select channel numbers If the channels are new this adds them to the part at the level indicated If already in the part this modifies their level Records the modified part Note When you initially display a multipart cue any channel levels that are tracking from the previous cue are displayed in green new levels are displayed in blue When you press Part this changes Channels that make up the selected part are now displayed in blue channels that make up other parts of the multipart cue are displayed in green or gray in Blina 95 96 Modifying fade and wait times If you do not assign fade and wait times to a part Impression 2 automat ically assigns it the defa
166. eration Factory Use On Off Normal operation Factory Use On Off Normal operation Factory Use On ONOUORWN ZXXXX lt XX lt XX lt lt Close the face panel and replace the screws The Remote Interface checks DIP switch settings when it is turned on Restart the unit for new DIP switch settings to take effect 291 292 Installing Remote Video Interface The Remote Video Interface allows you to attach Expression peripherals to your network Each Remote Video Interface contains connectors for three types of network cable Choose the connector that matches your network cable type To install the Remote Video Interface follow these steps 1 Plug the network cable into the appropriate connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet 3 If necessary set DIP switches as described below The Remote Video Interface provides ports for remote accessories It sup ports one monitor the connector labeled CRT 1 is active an alphanu meric keyboard and an RFU and provides a serial port for a digitizer The illustrations below show the Remote Video Interface s front and back panels and indicate the connector used ETCNet Remote Video Interface back panel by each accessory EF CRT Displays CRT1 co CRT 2 CO Keo a feo ca ees ES Keyboard RFI ETCNet RS 232 Digitizer Serial 4 8 Gamo e 1 5A FB H Switched Outlets AC Input
167. erpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating th at the console will read the next number as a channel number Channel display line This line displays the current channel number being tracked In Flexichan nel mode used channels are marked with an asterisk Cue display The cue display lists the cues the channel tracks through and the level recorded in each Prompt area The operator prompt displays messages to guide you through Tracksheet functions Softkeys Tracksheet functions for S1 through S8 11 Patch The Patch display allows you to create and modify your patch Display mode Keypad corner Chan 1 Profile SAPER zar 1 IES Square 2 Hom 3 Fast Bottom 4 Slow Top menu 5 Fast Top 6 Full at 1 7 eat 57 8 10 9 Hot Patch ner Leve Prof ile 501 i 502 Patch window 80 6 503 4B Prompt area Softkeys Multiplex Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner This window indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Profile menu Displays the profiles available to assign to dimmers Patch window Lists channels dimmers patched to channels and levels and or profi
168. es all information recorded on the dis kette Formatting does not affect show in console Before you can use a diskette in an Impression 2 you must format it on either an Expression 2 line console or a standard PC compatible personal computer To format a diskette on Impression 2 follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions menu Enter 3 Insert standard 3 5 inch high density diskette in disk drive 4 Press 4 Format Disk The following screen appears Enter 5 Press Enter to format Message appears on screen the diskette or press Formatting disk Do not remove Clear to cancel the format from drive Message remains until command disk is formatted Warning When you select this option any fade in progress stops once the formatting process is complete the fade jumps to the point it would have reached if it hadn t been interrupted chapter 15 diskette functions 177 Recording a show on diskette When you record a show to diskette all system settings patch settings cues groups submasters effects and any other information that you have in the console at the time you record the show are saved We rec ommend that you keep at least two backup copies of each show on diskette When using the record option any fades being executed are interrupted during the record operation fades resume when record is complete To
169. es can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to assign your desired fade times Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Settings Selects System Settings menu and press Enter 3 Select 3 Default Fade Prompt reads Time and press Enter Enter default up fadetime 4 Press 6 to enterasixsecond Corner reads upfade time UpTime 6 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Enter default down fadetime 6 Press 3 to enter a three Corner reads second downfade time DnTime 3 7 Press Enter Fade times are reset Note If the upfade and downfade times are the same both will change when you change the upfade time 17 Setting default Level Impression 2 allows you to assign a value to the Level key The default value is 100 percent You may assign Level any value between zero and 100 Follow these steps to assign a value to Level Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 4 Default Level and press Enter 4 Use the keypad to enter the two digit value 00 99 you wish to assign to Level or press Full Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter default level Press FULL button for 100 New default for Level i
170. et then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select dimmer level Press FULL button for 100 Advisory reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Dimmers are set to desired level Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Prompt reads Select dimmer number s to unset then press ENTER Enter 0 to unset all dimmers Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Dimmers are unset Impression 2 user manual Working with Sensor backup looks A backup look is a recording of a selected look on stage stored in the Sensor CEM The Sensor system allows you to use either your Impres sion 2 console or any CEM to bring that look up on stage You May save and use up to 32 backup looks Recording a backup look chapter 19 sensor dimming To record a backup look follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Use your console to Creates look on stage create the desired look on stage 2 Press Setupl Selects Setup display 3 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 4 Press 1 Dimming Selects System Status display System Status Enter 5 Press S3 Record Prompt reads Backup Select backup look to record then press ENTER 6 Enter the backup look Advisory reads number 1 32 and press Record Backup processing has Enter completed Press any key to continue 223 Playing a backup look Playing a bac
171. f characters including letters numbers and symbols In the Patch display Impression 2 allows you to view labels you have assigned to dimmers Press S8 Show Hide Labels to reveal or hide the labels Hiding labels provides space to show additional dimmers This example demonstrates how to assign a label to a dimmer Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 Press 5 Label Selects dimmer 5 to label Prompt reads Type dimmer label F6 clear to end F7 last dimmer label F8 next dimmer label 3 Use the alphanumeric key Corner reads Label House board to type House 4 Press Enter on the Dimmer 5 is labeled House Impression 2 keypad Note In step 4 if you wish to label another dimmer press F7 or F8 instead of Enter Impression 2 records the current dimmer s label and brings up the previous or next dimmer to be labeled Impression 2 user manual Assigning a profile to a dimmer chapter 4 patch Dimmer profiles allow you to select one of ten output curves profiles and assign it to a dimmer These profiles allow you to compensate for non linear light outputs from certain types of fixtures or incorporate a preferred response in a fade The ten curves are listed below If you do not select a profile all dimmers use profile zero a linear fade Follow these instructions to assign a profile to a dimmer Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 Ifthe Dim LED is unlit
172. fade push the submaster s slider to a higher level than the fade lower if inhibitive Once the slider passes the fade or meets it at Full on pile on submasters or zero on inhibitive submasters control of the fade transfers to the slider and you have full manual control of the submaster Move the slider to set the fade level chapter 11 submasters 137 138 Labeling submasters Impression 2 allows you to use an alphanumeric keyboard to label sub masters Submaster names can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long See page 278 for information about installing an alphanumeric keyboard Follow these steps to add the name Bedroom wash to submaster 4 Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Sub 4 3 Press Label 4 Use the alphanumeric key board to enter the label Type Bedroom wash 5 On the Impression 2 key pad press Enter Copying submasters Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Prompt reads Type submaster name Corner reads Label Bedroom wash Submaster 4 is labeled Bedroom wash To copy a look from one submaster to another follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 3 Enter the number of the submaster you wish to copy 4 Press Record Sub 5 Enter the number of the new submaster 6 Press Enter Submaster copy is
173. fect 7 Random Rate 8 Attribute Attributes 8 Return gt Effect Subr 2 1 Step 2 Style 3 Select Cue 4 Type Level 5 Insert Step 6 Delete Step 7 More Softkeys gt Blind Subroutine 8 Up Down Follow Fader 2 1 Enable Disable Quickstep 6 Delete 7 More Softkeys Fader 8 DMX In Impression 2 user manual Park 1 rs 2 A 3 B 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page Setup 1 Show Name 2 Set Clock I O Configuration 1 DMX512 Port 2 DMX512 Mode 3 DMX512 Start 4 DMX512 Speed 8 Return gt Setup Print Functions 1 Stop Printer 2 Pause Printer 8 Return gt Setup Designer s Editing 1 Select Region 2 Insert Replace 3 Delete Entry 4 5 E 6 Clear Region 7 More Softkeys gt Des 2 8 Return Setup Macro Editing 1 Select Macro 2 Insert Replace 3 Delete Entry 4 5 6 Delete Macro 7 More Softkeys gt Macro 2 8 Return gt Setup appendix e softkeys System Settings Designer s Layout 1 Purge Flexi 1 Sheet Console Sliders 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 Return gt Setup 8 Return gt Settings Disk Clear Functions 1 1 Reset System 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 Return gt Setup 8 Return gt Setup Options 1 Disable MIDI 2 3 Ae 5 A 6 S ES 8 Return gt Setup Designer s Editing 2 1 On Sub Bump 2 Off Sub Bump 3 E r 5 Copy Reg
174. fications 307 Submasters in 169 Manual 328 Manual Mode 328 Override cue 104 Override submaster fade 137 Master Set type 23 Memory 4 Menu Clear Functions 194 Designer s Worksheet Setup 20 Diskette Functions 175 ETCLink Functions 211 212 226 Print Functions 182 Setup 337 System settings 15 Impression 2 user manual MIDI 228 Configuring ETC MIDI 229 ETC MIDI 228 ETC MIDI message formats 229 230 Installation 285 Interfacing with 285 Message definitions 231 Out Thru settings 286 Pinout 286 MIDI Show Control 228 232 Configuring 233 Disable 233 Fire 233 Go 233 Resume 233 Stop 233 Minus 328 Modify Channel 95 Cue attributes 70 Cues 70 Effect 153 Groups 112 With Group 114 Macro 171 Multipart fade time 96 Multipart wait time 96 Submaster 135 Modifying Submasters 135 Monitor Connectors 296 Pinout 296 Remote video 296 Move Event 328 Move Program 329 Moving channels 44 329 Moving lights 120 Moving SMPTE events 251 MSC 228 232 Multipart cue 91 329 Converting regular cue to 93 Creating 92 Definition 329 Delete part 94 Editing channels 94 Modify channels 95 Wait time 94 Multiplex 219 276 329 Multiplex dimming technology 40 Multiplexed dimmers 40 275 Multiplexer 40 Musical Instrument Digital Inter face 228 index N Naming Channels 48 Cues 69 210 Groups 210 Shows 27 Submasters 210 Next Page 6 O Off Sub Bump 169 329 On Sub Bump 169 330 One to one patch 30 Only 120 330 Optiona
175. gh the remainder of the original track To track the level modification we just recorded in the example above use Track instead of Record to modify channel 1 Press Track enter cue number and press Enter If you use Track rather than Record to record the changes made to the cue illustrated in Figure 1 the results will be as illustrated in Figure 3 versus the results from using Record illustrated in Figure 2 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 50 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 3 The modified level is recorded in the current cue and carries through the entire track cues 1 through 3 83 Inserting cues If you insert a cue in this sequence Record and Track produce different results Record saves changes only in the cue you insert Track saves the changes you make and tracks them through the following cues The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 With cue 1 in a fader channel 4 is added at 50 percent The new look is inserted as cue 1 1 Stage Rel Rel Release captured channels Cue 1 Go Play back cue 1 Chan 4 At 5 0 Add channel 4 at 50 percent Record 111 111 Enter Inserts new look as cue 1 1 Figure 4 displays the result inserting the cue using Record Notice the new channel is not added to the cues that follow it Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 00 Cue
176. gs of dimmers assigned to a channel while you set them To select channels from the patch screen follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 Press Channell 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired channel num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one channel 4 Press Full to set channel level at 100 percent Level to set channel at the default level or press At and enter a level set ting 5 Press Rel to release channel s Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Selected channels are set at the indicated level Impression 2 user manual Dimmer check A dimmer check allows you to raise your dimmers to a specified level on stage one at a time Impression 2 allows you to select the starting dimmer and set it at a level Once you select the dimmer use to check each consecutive dimmer Follow these steps to run a dimmer check Keystrokes 1 Press Dim 2 Press 1 to start dimmer check with dimmer 1 3 Press Atl 4 Press 7 5 to set the dim mer s level at 75 percent You may also press Full or Level to set the dimmer at 100 percent or at the Level setting 5 Press Enter 6 Press to select dimmer 2 Repeat as necessary Press Clear to end dimmer check Actions Prompt reads Enter dimmer number s then press AT to select level Keypad corner read
177. han one dimmer PROFILE to assign a profile 4 Press S1 Multiplex Selected dimmers are identified as Multiplexed Note Use S2 A and S3 B along with the numeric keypad to enter dimmer numbers as you create your patch If you select a multiplexed dimmer without specifying A or B the system defaults to A Impression 2 user manual chapter 4 patch Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Strand CD80 dimmer racks have 48 dimmer slots Each dimmer slot holds either two 2 4KW dimmers or one 6kW or 12kW dimmer The console requires that you include all 96 possible dimmer numbers per rack in the patch Refer to the charts below to determine dimmer numbers for each slot on each rack When patching 6kW or 12kW dimmers enter the slot s odd dimmer number under the desired channel number Enter the slot s even dimmer number under channel zero For example to patch a 6kW dimmer into the last dimmer slot on the first rack enter dimmer 95 in the desired channel number and dimmer 96 in channel zero 1 3 5 7 11 9711 99 105 105 107 J6 12 35 100 104 106 106 15 15 1419 121 1123 109 111 1113 115 117 14 16 18 20 122 1124 119 11214 1411161 116 25 27 1291131 11531135 121 123 127 129 131 261128 50 1132 34 56 122 14 126 130 152 371139 1411143 145 147 133 135 43571 138 1411 145 38 140 1421144 14611485 134 11357 133 140 142 144 49 51 53 55 57 59 146 1471 149 151 153
178. hanged from what it was in the previous cue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output is lower than it was in the previous cue Magenta Channel output level is the same as it was in the previous cue tracking Blue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output level is higher than it was in the previous cue Changing pages S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page softkeys allow you to change pages on many displays The arrow keys may also be used to switch from page to page Pressing takes you to the first page pressing T takes you to the previous page pressing J takes you to the next page and pressing gt takes you to the final page Impression 2 user manual Stage The Stage display shows you the current levels of all active channels Up to 125 channels can appear on the display at a time Grandmaster Display mode Keypad corner Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 001 02 03 6 15 16 17 Channel level gt 2 31 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 40 41 47 display 091 92 9 Prompt area Fader A B Fader C D Cue 6 Cue Type Wait Link Follow Rate Fader Comp lete 11 1 i status 100 100 ES Gunshot Attribute bar Cue Part Time Wait Link Follow Rate 10 5 chapter 2 monitor displays Clear gt 6 PT Toad exits Headquarters 11 PT 25 Softkeys sneen PE update Ponty Ft on ren Cue List Grandmaster Current Grandmaster setting Blackout alert and submaster page Display mode Current display m
179. he Print Functions display Press S2 Pause Printer to interrupt a print function Press S2 again to resume printing Pile on submaster A pile on submaster contains a specified set of channels recorded at pro portional levels Pile on submasters interact with established channel levels on a highest level basis Play Backup Play Backup is softkey S2 in the System Status display Use S2 Play Backup to play back a recording of a selected look on stage that is stored in a Sensor CEM Plus Press to increase the selected number by one Example Cue 6 Time 1 0 sets the fade time for cue 6 to 12 seconds Example Dim 1 At 7 5 patches dimmer 1 at 77 percent Positive Negative Positive Negative is softkey S1 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Press S1 Positive Negative to change the effect attribute from a pos itive chase steps are at their low value when off and their high level when on to a negative chase steps are at their high level when off and their low level when on All effects must have either the positive or negative attribute assigned all other attributes are optional Previous Page Previous Page is softkey S4 in many displays Press S4 Previous Page to go backward one display page Print Screen Print Screen is softkey S1 in the Load Management display Press S1 Print Screen to print a list of dimmer load errors appendix d reference 331 332
180. he back of the con sole labeled MIDI In Do not insert MIDI cable into connector labeled Keyboard 3 If you are sending MIDI commands from the console insert another standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled MIDI Out MIDI console connectors DIN 5 pin female MIDI pinout 1 not connected 2 Ground 3 not connected 4 MIDI 5 MIDI 285 MIDI Out Thru jumper setting You may set the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru port Follow these steps to do so 1 Locate the jumper at location J5 J8 on Insight 2x on the face panel circuit board in the lid of the console With the lid in an upright posi tion the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board 2 The jumper at location J5 J8 on Insight 2x should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1 A on Insight consoles for MIDI Out to be active To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 B on Insight 2x On older consoles with keyswitch power switches the jumper locations are slightly different Follow these steps with older consoles 1 Locate the jumper at location J20 on the face panel circuit board in the lid of the console With the lid in an upright position the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board just below the level wheel 2 The jumper at location J20 should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1 for MIDI Out to be acti
181. he new type Again move its slider to zero if the green LED blinks or to 10 if the red LED blinks See Submaster LEDs on page 127 for more information about the LED 125 Submaster pages Impression 2 provides ten pages of submasters A page is a block of con sole memory that contains one set of 24 recorded submasters corre sponding to the 24 submaster sliders The ten pages of memory increases the number of possible submasters to 240 Impression 2 displays the message Sub page 1 2 3 in the upper left corner of the display to indicate the current submaster page To switch from one page to the other press Pagel enter the desired page number and press Enter When you switch submaster pages any submasters on stage remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new sub master loads submaster LEDs flash slowly indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded page If flashing red the new sub master is inhibitive if green the new submaster is pile on When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flashing This prevents the stage from going black or changing levels when you switch pages Fast flashes designate a submaster with a dwell time of Hold See Submaster LEDs on page 127 for more informa tion about LEDs Note When you read a new show into the console from a disk the con sole loads the same page number that was loaded
182. hen press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects step 5 Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes step 5 Step 6 becomes step 5 step 7 becomes step 6 and so on Prompt reads Select step numbers Records your changes to the cue Editing step characteristics Use the arrow keys to select step characteristics to edit For example to edit a step s In time follow these instructions Keystrokes dle 2 154 Press Blind Cue 2 Use J to select the step you want to edit for exam ple step 2 Or Press S1 Step 2 Use gt to highlight the In time field in step 2 or Press S7 More Soft keys S3 In Dwell Out Press 8 the new In time Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step numbers Prompt reads Enter step in time New step time is added Impression 2 user manual Adding elements To add a channel or group to a step follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Select the step you wish Prompt reads to modify using J and 1 Select step numbers or press S1 Step and enter the step number 3 Press Enter And Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step 4 Enter the channel or group Prompt reads number to add Select channel numbers 5 Press En
183. hori zontally Press T or 4 to move the highlight vertically When you reach the right end of a line pressing gt moves to the next line When you reach the last line press 4 and enter a new time to add a new SMPTE event Hint If you are creating a series of similar SMPTE events you may find it helpful to create one event then copy it See Copying SMPTE events on page 250 for more information chapter 20 control interfaces 243 244 In the SMPTE Edit display Follow these steps to create a SMPTE program from the SMPTE Events display Keystrokes 1 10 Bs 12 13 Record the cues submas ters and macros you want to include in the program Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Enter Enter 1 O 0 Press gt Press 1 Press gt Press 1 2 5 Zero stops the fade 100 is normal With fade rate set at 50 cue runs at half its recorded rate If no rate is entered the cue runs at its recorded rate Press gt Repeat steps 6 through 8 for fader C D Press gt Enter the desired submas ter number then press to set the submaster On or to set the submaster off Press gt to move the highlight to the submaster Rate field Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display Prompt reads Select SMPTE Time Press TIME to edit specific fields Selects one second as the time of the first SMPTE eve
184. how Labels System Status System Status is softkey S4 in the Rack Status and Dimmer Status displays Use S4 System Status to check information about your Sensor dim ming system including system firing mode current backup look status ETCLink errors and system configuration Thru Use Thru to select a continuous group of dimmers or channels Example Channel 1 Thru 5 And 8 At 7 5 sets channel 1 through 5 and channel 8 to 75 percent Time Use Time to enter upfade and downfade times for cues and submasters Example Cue 6 Time 5 Enter 1 0 sets cue 6 s upfade to five sec onds and its downfade to ten seconds Example Cue 7 Time 3 Time 5 Enter sets cue 7 s upfade to three seconds and its downfade to five seconds Time Time is softkey S2 in the Real Time Programs display Use S2 Time to go to the time field for editing appendix d reference 341 Track Use Track to record channel levels that are to be tracked into subsequent cues Example Cue 5 Track Enter tracks channels from cue 5 into follow ing Cues Tracked channels A tracked channel is a channel whose level is unchanged from the preced ing cue Tracked channels are displayed in magenta Tracksheet display Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the next Tracksheet allows you to display one channel s settings for all recorded cues At a glance you can see
185. ic keyboard on page 278 for installation infor mation Naming cues submasters groups and shows You can use the alphanumeric keyboard to assign names to cues sub masters groups and shows Names can consist of letters numbers or the symbols 81 1 as well as the comma and period Follow these steps to name a cue submaster or group 1 Press Stagel Blind or Fader to select a display mode 2 Press Cue Submaster or Group then use the console s number keys to select the desired cue submaster or group 3 Press Label on the console or F5 on the keyboard and type the desired name on the alphanumeric keyboard Names can have up to 16 characters You may enter the name using overwrite or insert mode In overwrite you type over any previously entered characters in insert mode each new character pushes the previously entered characters one space to the right Press Insert on the keyboard to toggle between insert and overwrite mode 4 Press Enter on the alohanumeric keyboard to record the name or press Esc to quit and return to the original Impression 2 display screen Note Press F8 on the alphanumeric keyboard to advance to the next cue submaster or group Press F7 to go to the previous cue submaster or group Press F6 to clear the name from the cursor to the end of the line Naming shows To name a show press Setup S1 Show Name then use the alphanu meric
186. igers _ ESA SE Sliders Return 4 Press 2 to select a 12x12 template without submas ters 5 Press S1 Sheet Sliders to disable the slider con trols on the console or S1 Console Sliders to disable the slider controls on the digitizer if any 6 Press Enter Corner reads Menu 2 Display indicates which option is selected softkey indicates which option is not selected Designer s Worksheet option is set Impression 2 user manual Enable disable Blackout key Impression 2 s Blackout key may be enabled or disabled Impression 2 defaults to enabled chapter 3 system settings Follow these steps to enable or disable Blackout Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter Select 8 Blackout Key and press Enter Press 1 or 0 Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enable disable blackout key 1 Enable 0 Disable Corner reads Black 1 Or Black 0 Blackout is enabled or disabled 21 Enable disable Flexichannel Impression 2 s Command display can be set to operate in full display mode or in Flexichannel mode In full display mode channel displays show all channels and their current status In Flexichannel mode only channels with a recorded level appear Impression 2 defaults to full chan nel display Follow these steps to enable or disable Flexichannel Keyst
187. impression 2 Lighting control system Version 2 0 impression 2 Lighting control system Version 2 0 User Manual Copyright 1994 96 Electronic Theatre Controls 4041M1001 Revised May 1996 Limited Warranty Electronic Theatre Controls ETC warrants to the original owner or retail customer that for a period of one year from date of delivery of a portable system or energization of a permanently installed system up to a maximum of 18 months from delivery its products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service Warranty is limited to 90 days for rental equipment Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident negligence alteration abuse or misuse or any accessories or parts not supplied by ETC Warranty does not cover consumable parts such as fuses lamps color media or components warranted directly to the owner by the original manufacturer ETC s warranty does not extend to items not manufactured by us Freight terms on warranty repairs are FOB ETC fac tory or designated repair facility Collect shipments or freight allowances will not be accepted ETC s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be to repair or replace at ETC s option such parts as shall be determined to be defective on ETC s inspection ETC will not assume any responsibility for any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without ETC s prior written authorizatio
188. in yellow Channel levels set by channel sliders are displayed in gold Release Use Rel to release selected captured and independent channels from the control of the keypad in Stage Blind or Tracksheet modes First press releases any selected channels second releases captured channels and third releases independent channels Example Channel 5 At 7115 Rell sets channel 5 at 75 percent then releases it Replace Insert Insert Replace is softkey S2 in the Macro Editing and Designer s Worksheet Editing displays Press S2 Insert Replace to change the editing mode of the macro dis play Replace Mode overwrites macro entries and Insert Mode inserts new entries before the currently selected entry displayed in yellow Reset Loop Reset Loop is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S8 Reset Loop to set the first and last valid SMPTE frames for the SMPTE program so that the internal clock can correctly reset to the start ing frame Reset System Reset System is softkey S1 in the Clear Functions display Use S1 Reset System to clear all data from console and reset all set tings to factory defaults Return Return is softkey S8 in numerous displays Use S8 Return to return to the previous display Impression 2 user manual Reverse Reverse is softkey S3 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Use S3 Reverse to cause the effect step list to run in reverse or
189. in your system set system modes and screen for mats and choose default settings for a variety of console functions The following illustration shows default settings Number of Dimmers Number of Channels Default Fade Time Default Level Default Fader Clear Time ak Time Designe Worksheet Setup Blackout Key F lex i channe I Master Type Set Channe bmasters 1 to 1 2 24 hour clock Record Lockout Bump keys DAAN m Sun 1024 300 Up 5 Down 5 Full 0 5 1 Console Enabled Disabled Grandmas ter 12 Hour AM PM Disabled Enabled 1 Purge Flexi S2 3 4 5 S6 Ss 8 a IE ee ee ee ee This chapter includes the following sections e Setting number of dimmers e Setting number of channels e Setting default fade times e Setting default Level e Setting default fader clear times e Setting default Sneak time e Selecting Designer s Worksheet option e Blackout key e Selecting Flexichannel mode e Master Type e Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 e Selecting time format e Record Lockout e Bump keys e Setting clock e Naming show Setting number of dimmers One of the first steps in configuring Impression 2 is to enter the number of dimmers in your system Impression 2 defaults to 1 024 dimmers the maximum number of dimmers the console can address Follow these steps to select up to 1 024 dimmers Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set
190. inate or dras tically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages See Disabling second ary messages on page 226 for more information Impression 2 displays error messages in advisory windows that appear regardless of which display mode you have chosen They may also appear in abbreviated forms on the Status and About screens Advisories are cleared as soon as you enter any keystroke For example suppose the dimming system detects a problem with dimmer 1 As shown on the screen below an advisory message appears informing you of the problem Stage Chan 15 25 0S 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 duisory Dimmer 1 output has failed off Either the cir t breaker has tripped or the dimmer ne gt to be replaced Press any key to continue 096 97 98 03 04 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Label 1 5 S3 S4 s5 S6 S7 8 E pam Rate Duickstep See ETCLink errors on page 303 for a list of possible error messages 1 chapter 19 sensor dimming 225 Disabling secondary messages You may prevent secondary ETCLink advisory messages from being dis played while you are
191. ing are located on the back panel of the console and all ETCNet interface devices The connector you use will depend on what kind of wiring your location has installed For more information about wiring choices see the ETCNet Planning and Installa tion Guide To attach Impression 2 to the ETCNet network insert the connector at the console end of the network cable into the twisted pair console connector Attach other devices to the interface device as described in the appropri ate sections of this manual Note For continued compliance with emissions requirements all cables with the exception of twisted pair cable must be shielded 288 Impression 2 user manual appendix a installation ETCNet cabling DIP switch settings Before you use the console on the ETCNet network set the ETCNet DIP switches as described below 1 Locate the DIP switches on the back panel of the console to the left of the ETCNet connector s Set DIP switch 7 to indicate what kind of wiring you are using DIP 7 Wiring type connector Up BNC ThinNet connector Down RJ45 Twisted Pair connector Set DIP switches 2 and 3 to indicate ETCNet network status DIP 2 DIP 3 Console mode on start up Up Up Network off Down Down Network on If you are using Twisted Pair wiring it may be necessary to change the setting of DIP switch 8 If you are using an external null concen trator set DIP switch 8 up If not set the switch down DIP 8 Twisted Pair Pol
192. inutes to complete Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel 7 Press Enter to proceed New loads are recorded for all with the load record or dimmers with levels above zero press Clear to cancel the operation Impression 2 user manual Checking dimmer loads chapter 19 sensor dimming Load Check compares the current load on selected dimmers with their recorded loads Loads that differ by more than 20 percent are shown in the Load Management display Use Page and Page to page through the display The system checks load information only for selected dim mers To identify the dimmer s you wish to check use either the Impres sion 2 or the CEM to set the desired dimmers at a level above zero The system checks 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been checked If you have multiple racks 24 dim mers in each rack are checked simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system checks 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Load Check changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a check load oper ation in progress press S7 Cancel Enter Follow these steps to check loads for your system Keystrokes Action 1 Set dimmers to be checked to a level above zero Only dimmers above zero are checked 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions me
193. ion 6 A 7 More Softkeys gt Des 8 E Macro Editing 2 1 On Sub Bump 2 Off Sub Bump Fe A 5 Copy Macro 6 7 More Softkeys gt Macro 8 E 347 ETCLink Functions 1 Enable Disable ETCLink 2 A 3 B 4 5 6 Unset Dimmer 7 Set Dimmer 8 Return gt Setup Dimmer Status 4 System Status 5 Select Dimmer 6 Rack Status 7 a 8 Return gt ETCLink Channel Attributes 1 Independent 2 Flip 3 Label 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 S 7 A 8 Return Setup SMPTE 1 Internal Clock 2 Clock Enable Disable 3 Manual Mode 4 Pause Mode 5 Step 6 Learn Mode 7 More Softkeys gt SMPTE 2 8 Return gt Setup Real Time Programs 1 Select Program 2 Time 3 Days of Week 4 Macro 5 Label 6 Delete Program 7 More Softkeys gt RTC 2 8 Return gt Setup System Status 1 Multiplex 2 Play Backup 3 Record Backup 4 5 Dimmer Status 6 Rack Status 7 8 Return gt ETCLink Load Management 1 Print Screen 2 3 4 Load Check 5 Record Loads 6 Clear Loads 7 Cancel 8 Return gt ETCLink SMPTE 2 1 Select Event 2 SMPTE Time 3 Cue 4 Rate 5 Bump 6 Macro 7 More Softkeys gt SMPTE 3 8 Reset Loop Real Time Programs 2 1 Insert Program 2 Copy Program 3 Move Program 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 7 More Softkeys gt RTC 8 Sort Rack Status 1 E
194. is Unit Under the Status column in the Remote Units list the percentage of completion will be shown When the word Pass is visible the update process is done 5 Remove the Remote Unit Update disk from the console diskette drive 6 Turn the console off and then back on again The process is complete If you have any questions or experience difficulties while upgrading please call ETC s Technical Services department at 800 775 4382 295 296 Installing remote video monitors You may want to install additional monitors at remote locations Install monitors by connecting them to any interface devices on ETCNet Addi tional monitors duplicate the master console s displays in remote loca tions Connect monitors to interface devices by following these steps 1 VGA monitor console connector Turn monitor power switch to its On position HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout Red video Green video Blue video Ground Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground not connected Ground Ground not connected H HAV sync V sync not connected Insert the female end of the monitor power cord in the monitor con nector and the male end of the monitor power cord in the interface device connector labeled Switched outlets Connect the cable to the connector labeled CRT 1 on the interface device Impression 2 user manual Installing Infrared Remote Focus Unit The optional Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU allo
195. it 0 Bump 11 Mwait 0 0 Bump16 Mwait 0 Bump20 Mwait 0 B Setup 1 Enter PurgeF lexi Sta 4 Enter the new region num ber or select an existing region either by touching the region or by entering its number from the key pad 5 Touch Enter Mwait 0 Bump8 t 0 Bi J 2 Mwait 0 t 0 Bumpi Mw 321 Mwait 0 Bu Prompt reads Outline region or touch ENTER to continue Impression 2 user manual 6 To create a new region or The console displays a highlighted R to add to an existing next to the macro number to indicate region trace the area you that it has been assigned to a region want to define for that Prompt reads region number then press Select operations for this region Enter To keep an exist Touch ENTER MACRO when done ing region touch Enter 7 Touch desired keystrokes As you touch keys on the worksheet to create a new macro or console they are displayed on the assigned to the new editing screen region 8 Use the arrow keys to edit macros if necessary Macro editing is described in greater detail in Chapter 15 Working with macros 9 Press or touch Enter Prompt reads Macro to save the macro Select region number or touch a Each macro has a 50 key previously defined region then stroke limit touch ENTER 10 Enter another macro or edit an existing macro by follow ing steps 4 through 9 Or return to another mode by touching the appropriate key Hint If you need to exceed the 50 keystrok
196. itizer s size Each digitizer allows you to program up to 2 000 regions each of which may be associated with a macro 12 x 12 inch digitizer If you own a 12 x 12 inch digitizer you can select one of two digitizer lay outs One layout provides control of submasters and faders while the other deletes the submasters for increased workspace area 12 x 17 inch digitizer tablet The 12 x 17 layout provides control of fader keys and all console functions other than submasters fader sliders and the Grandmaster slider Note You may control submaster sliders from either the console or the digitizer but not both Use the Designer s Worksheet Setup display to select this option See Setting Designer s Worksheet options on page 20 for information on the Designer s Worksheet Setup display Using the Designer s Worksheet chapter 18 accessories To use the Designer s Worksheet to control console keys touch the cor responding area on the worksheet with the stylus To use submaster slid ers or the wheels drag the stylus along the corresponding control strip The remaining area of the tablet is available for user definable regions To each of these regions you may assign a macro containing a sequence of up to 50 console keystrokes Each region s macro can execute cues manipulate channel levels or execute any series of keystrokes Once you assign a macro to a region start the macro by touching the region on the tablet For example you might
197. ize improperly Follow these steps to install an alphanumeric keyboard 1 Be sure the selector switch is set to the AT position if applicable 2 Insert the keyboard cable into the connector labeled Keyboard on the Impression 2 or Remote Interface back panel Console connector DIN 5 pin female Keyboard pinout Clock Data Reset Ground 5 Vdc IAUN 278 Impression 2 user manual Installing a printer appendix a installation Impression 2 supports parallel printers including most laser printers Printer functions are described in Chapter 17 Printing Follow these steps to install printer 1 Insert parallel printer cable into connector labeled Parallel Printer on the back panel of the console 2 Insert opposite end of printer cable into printer 3 Turn printer power switch on and verify that printer is on line Console connector Printer connector DB25F Centronics D36 Pinout Signal Pinout 1 STRB 1 2 DO 2 3 D1 3 4 D2 4 5 D3 5 6 D4 6 7 D5 7 8 D6 8 9 D7 9 10 ACK 10 11 Busy 11 12 13 Not used 12 18 14 to 17 not connected 13 to 15 17 19 to 36 18 to 25 Ground 16 279 Installing Designer s Worksheet Designer s Worksheet is a remote digitizer tablet available for use with ETC consoles Two different models of Kurta digitizers have been used as Designer s Worksheets and each has a different configuration procedure described below Refer to Kurta digitizer tablet documentation if you n
198. kes 1 Press Setup Action Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management display ment and press Enter 4 Press S6 Clear Loads Prompt reads If you wish you may To clear loads select dimmer s and enter a specific dimmeror press ENTER Enter 0 to clear loads dimmers to clear for all dimmers 5 Press 0 Enter Advisory reads Recorded loads will be erased for all dimmers with levels above zero disabling load error messages for those dimmers Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel 6 Press Enter to proceed Loads are cleared for all dimmers with with the load clear or press Clear to cancel the operation levels above zero Once complete advisory reads Clear Loads processing has completed Press any key to continue 217 Load errors When a dimmer s load isn t within 20 percent of its recorded load it gen erates a load error that appears on the Load Management display The information shown on the Load Management display includes the dimmer number the recorded load of the dimmer and the actual load the system has detected for that dimmer 3 55 PM D immer lecorded Load Actual Load Dimmer Recorder oa Actual Load OU OW 900W Follow these steps to list all dimmers that have load errors Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Se
199. keyboard to enter the show s name 210 Impression 2 user manual chapter 19 SENSO dimming Impression 2 lighting control systems may be connected to ETC Sensor dimming systems via the ETCLink communication network In this config uration the Impression 2 can provide you with a wide range of system status information including overall system status and specific informa tion about individual dimmer modules and dimmer racks You may access ETCLink through the ETCLink Functions menu Most of the dimmer rack and system information accessible through Impression 2 displays is also available from your Sensor dimming system through the Control Electronics Module CEM To reach the ETCLink Functions menu press Setup 9 Enter The following display appears 02 40 PM ETCLink Status Disabled 1 Dimming System Status gt Rack Sta Dimmer S Load Manag D isploy Advisories Enob led 52 S3 84 5 S6 S7 8 a a aie Dimmer Dimmer Return Enabling ETCLink Before using ETCLink functions you Must connect the system to the ETCLink network Follow these steps to activate your ETCLink connec tion allowing you to monitor the dimming system Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Select 6 Options Set Selects Options Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Press 8 ETCLink Prompt reads Enter Enable disable ETCLink 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter Dimmer Monitoring is enabled
200. kup look brings up the recorded look on stage You may play back a backup look from the console or from a CEM Only one backup look may be on stage at a time If there is a backup look on stage when you bring up a new one the second look replaces the first Up and down fade times for backup looks are five seconds They cannot be modified To use the Impression 2 to play a recorded backup look follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Press 1 Dimming Selects Dimming System Status System Status Enter display 4 Press S2 Play Backup Prompt reads Select backup look to play then press ENTER Enter 0 to return to normal operation 5 Enter the backup look Advisory reads number 1 32 and press Play Backup processing has Enter completed Press any key to continue Note To clear a playing backup look follow the procedure listed above but enter 0 in step 5 as the backup look number The currently playing backup look will be cleared from the stage 224 Impression 2 user manual Error messages ETCLink provides advisory messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potentially term
201. l 12 MIDI Show Control Device IDs 122 5 DMX In Starting Channel Disabled Infrared Remote Disabled SMPTE Input Disabled SMPTE Frame gt Second 30 Display Cue SMPTE List Cue List Dimmer Monitor ing Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 2 s3 S4 S5 S6 S7 se PO ee ee ee 3 Press 2 Enter The message Select MIDI receiver device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control ap pears 4 Enter the receiver device ID the ID of the device generating the MSC signal to which the console is listening The ID must be between zero and 126 5 Press Enter The message Select MIDI transmitter device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control ap pears 6 Enter the transmitter device ID the ID of the device to which the con sole is transmitting MIDI signal The ID must be between zero and 126 Press Enter Disable MIDI Show Control To disable MIDI Show Control from the Options Settings menu press 2 Enter S1 Disable MIDI chapter 20 control interfaces 233 MSC commands received by Impression 2 Impression 2 consoles enabled for MSC accept the following MSC com mands When the console receives one of these commands it executes the command immediately In order to accept MSC commands the con sole s receiver Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI device sending the signals Go lf no cue number is sent Go presses A B Go on Impression 2 The next c
202. l equipment Alphanumeric keyboard 278 Designer s Worksheet 280 Infrared Remote Focus Unit 203 297 Remote Focus Unit 284 Out 144 323 Out time 144 Output configuration 275 Output level conventions 3 P Page 6 126 330 Submasters 126 132 Park 13 259 330 Channel 262 Cue 264 Dimmer 260 Display 13 266 Group 264 Submaster 264 Unpark channel 263 Unpark cue 264 Unpark dimmer 261 Unpark group 264 Unpark submaster 264 Parts 91 329 330 Patch 29 330 Captured channels 36 Clear 196 198 Custom 30 Dimmers 31 Display 12 330 Multiplex 40 Print 189 Proportional patch 32 Reset 198 Pause Mode 331 Pause Printer 331 Pile on submaster 124 331 Pinout Alphanumeric keyboard 278 Dimmer 274 MIDI 286 Monitor 296 Printer 279 Remote macros 299 RFU 284 SMPTE 287 Play Backup 331 Playback Cues 97 Display 100 Macro 170 Monitor 314 320 SMPTE events 242 254 Specifications 306 Plus 331 Positive Negative 331 Previous 331 Previous Page 6 331 Print 181 Cancel printer 182 Channel Attributes 189 Cue list 186 Cues 183 Group list 186 Groups 184 Load Errors 218 Macro 188 Options 182 Patch 189 Pause printer 182 Print Screen 331 Printer 279 Real Time Programs 190 SMPTE 190 Stage display 182 Submaster list 187 Submasters 185 Tracksheet 191 Profile 332 Assign to dimmer 35 Dimmer 35 Specifications 307 Programming regions 206 Proportional patching 32 Purge Flexi 10 49 332 Q Quickstep 106 332 353 R Rack Sta
203. l spacing of subsequent programs is maintained Copy Region Copy Region is softkey S5 after S7 More Softkeys in the Designer s Worksheet Editing display Press S5 Copy Region to copy the contents of one region to a second region If the destination region is already recorded the console will require a confirmation Example S1 Select Region 5 S7 More Softkeys S5 Copy Region 9 Enter Enter copies region 5 to region 9 Crossfade In a crossfade cue channel levels that increase fade to their new level in the assigned upfade time Channel levels that decrease fade to their new level in the assigned downfade time The cue starts when you press Go You may use a wait time to delay the start of the upfade or downfade Cue Use Cuel to select a cue number Example Cue 156 1 selects cue 156 1 Cue SMPTE Cue is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S3 Cue to access the cue fields in the SMPTE Events display Press once to select the A B field twice to select the C D field Cue List The Cue List appears on the display The Cue List provides a list of cues for the show including all of the cues programmed attributes In addition the playback display provides information about which cue is active or run ning and on which fader the cue is running The Cue List will display the playing cue or the last cue played and then the pending cue The pending cue
204. l you move the slider to the home position If the green LED is blinking move the slider to zero If the red LED is blinking move the slider to 10 If the submasters are changing type you may need to do both When the slider reaches home the channel levels from the new page replace the old levels Note Ifa submaster slider has both a submaster loading and a submaster on hold the submaster on hold takes priority and the LED blinks fast Press the bump button to downfade the old submaster 127 Submaster bump buttons A bump button is located immediately below each submaster slider The bump button s function depends on its status see below and on whether the submaster has a programmed fade If the submaster does not have a programmed fade the bump button allows you to bring up the submaster s contents on stage instantly Press the bump button to raise the submaster to its full recorded level Hold the button to maintain the levels on stage Release the button to remove the submaster s levels If the submaster has a programmed fade the bump button allows you to start the fade or to reverse the direction of an ongoing fade Press the bump button to start the upfade Press the button again to interrupt the upfade and start the downfade Bump button status Submaster bump buttons may be individually enabled disabled or placed in Solo mode An enabled bump button functions normally a disabled button doesn t function at all and a b
205. lable for all functions Stage Blind Fader A B fader C D fader Both faders DMX In Tracksheet Patch Park Setup Flexichannel displays only recorded channels Submaster functions Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters Fully overlapping channel assignments Proportional channel levels Bump buttons on all 24 submasters may be placed in enabled dis abled or solo mode as a group or individually Integral LEDs on all 24 submasters Programmable fade and wait times Live and programmed rate control 12 submasters programmable for overlapping pile on or inhibitive operation All submasters programmable with effects Update function Control keypad features Submaster 24 may be used to master DMX In levels Submaster labels Channel functions Group function to allow channels to be manipulated as proportionally balanced groups Proportional adjustment with level wheel And Except Only and Thru functions for selection of control lists Full function Level sets a channel to a user selectable default value Channel Attribute display provides Independent Flip channel and channel Label attributes Impression 2 user manual Cue functions Up to 600 cues numbered 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue or macro Label Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attri
206. le S6 Clear Region 3 Enter Enter removes region 3 from the Designer s Worksheet layout It does not affect macro 3 Clock Enable Disable Clock Enable Disable is softkey S2 in the SMPTE Events display Use S21 Clock Enable Disable to start or stop the SMPTE internal clock If SMPTE input is enabled the internal clock will hold until the first SMPTE frame is received or until started manually by pressing S1 Inter nal Clock If the clock is disabled the SMPTE events will only be exe cuted if SMPTE input is received Copy Event Copy Event is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys twice in the SMPTE Events display Use S2 Copy Event to copy a group of SMPTE events The target time of the first event in the group must be specified The original spacing of subsequent events will be maintained Copy Macro Copy Macro is softkey S5 after S7 More Softkeys in the Macro Editing display Press S5 Copy Macro to copy the contents of one macro to a second macro If the destination macro is already recorded the console will require a confirmation Example S1 Select Macro 5 S7 More Softkeys S5 Copy Macro 9 Enter copies macro 5 to macro 9 appendix d reference Copy Program Copy Program is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Real Time Programs display Use S2 Copy Program to copy a group of programs The target time of the first program in the group must be specified The origina
207. le ments Inserting steps You can insert a new step at any point in an effect For example to insert a step between steps 4 and 5 follow these steps Keystrokes ily 2 6 Press Blind Cue 2 Press S7 More Soft keys Press S5 Insert Step Use the T and J keys to highlight the step you wish to insert or Enter the number of the step Press Enter Enter desired channels and settings Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step The new step is inserted in place of the old one The old step 5 becomes step 6 step 6 becomes step 7 and so on The timing and level attributes from step 4 are set as initial defaults in the new step 5 153 Deleting steps You may also delete steps from an effect For example to delete step 5 follow these instructions Keystrokes 1 2 Press Blind Cue 2 Press S7 More Soft keys Press S6 Delete Step Use the T and J keys to highlight step 5 or Press 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel Press Record Enter Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step number to delete t
208. lect 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management display ment and press Enter Note If you have a printer attached to your console you may print the Load Errors screen To print a list of dimmer load errors from this screen press S1 Print Screen The console sends the Load Error list to the printer 218 Impression 2 user manual Sensor dimming system status chapter 19 sensor dimming The System Status display provides information about your Sensor dim ming system Press Setup 9 Enter 1 Enter to access the System Status display 03 54 PM Multiplex Firing Mode Disabled Backup Looks Inactive ETCL ink System Wide Panic Error on Rack Racks On Line Racks in Configuration eo Ny S3 S4 s5 S6 S7 8 Play Record Dimmer Rack Pa Backup Backup Status Status Return Multiplex firing mode shows whether Multiplex mode is enabled or disabled for your system If Multiplex mode is disabled dimmers in multiplex mode function as normal dimmers Backup looks indicates whether a backup look is active and if so which one ETCLink displays any ETCLink errors System wide panic displays status of system wide panic Error on rack displays the number of the rack with an ETCLink error If errors exist on multiple racks the first rack with an error is dis played Racks on line displays the number of racks presently on line thr
209. les assigned to the dimmers In Flexichannel mode channels that are used are marked with an asterisk Prompt area The operator prompt displays messages to guide you through Patch func tions Softkeys Patch functions for S1 through S8 12 Impression 2 user manual Park The Park display lists parked dimmers on the top half of the screen and parked channels on the lower half along with their parked levels Display mode Keypad corner Porked Dimmers 10 15 Parked 85 85 Dimmer window Porked Channels Parked MS Channel 112 window FL 124 FL Prompt area Softkeys Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner This window indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Parked Dimmer window Lists up to 36 parked dimmers and their levels Parked Channel window Lists up to 36 parked channels and their levels Operator prompt line The operator prompt displays messages to guide you through Park functions Softkeys Park functions for S1 through S8 chapter 2 monitor displays 13 14 Impression 2 user manual chapter 3 System settings System settings allow you to customize Impression 2 for the number of dimmers and channels
210. llow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Tracksheet 2 Press 5 3 Press Cue 4 Press 2 Thru 5 Use And and Thru to indi cate a range or group of cues Press and to select the next or previous cue 5 Press At 5 0 You may also use the fader wheel El or Full to enter levels 6 Press Record 7 Press Enter to record level settings 8 To track a different chan nel enter the next chan nel number you want to display Action Displays Tracksheet Prompt reads Select channel to be tracked Selects channel 5 as the channel number to track Prompt reads Select cues to be modified Selects cues 2 through 5 as the cues that you want to track this channel through Cue numbers are highlighted in yellow Enters 50 percent intensity level Prompt reads Enter intensity Prompt reads To record press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records tracked channel in selected cues Prompt reads Select channel to be tracked Hint To track a channel at zero through all cues it is included in press Solo The channel goes to zero in all cues Press Record or Enter chapter 7 track 89 90 Impression 2 user manual chapter 8 multipart cues A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information Parts accept most standard cue attributes with the exception of Follow an
211. llows you to designate whether or not the levels in the dis played cue should track into subsequent cues until a new level instruction is encountered It also allows you to modify groups of cues quickly and add channels to cues You can also use it to create a new cue from the previous one by pulling all levels forward into the Blind display of the new cue Tracksheet mode Tracksheet displays one channel s level settings for all cues in which it appears From it you can follow the track of that channel quickly You can then select a cue or a group of cues from the Tracksheet and modify that channel s level throughout Tracksheet provides one means for tracking channels through allfade cues Track record When you record a series of cues you typically record the first cue then build the second cue from the first Some of the channels change but many remain the same The third cue is built from the second and so on This procedure results in many channels being set to a level in one cue and staying at that level for several cues A channel whose level does not change through a series of consecutive cues is said to track from cue to cue That same sequence of unchanged levels is also referred to as a track The Track key creates tracks by pulling channel levels from the previous cue in Blind mode or by adding tracks to existing cues in either Blind Stage or Tracksheet Rising channel levels are displayed in blue in the
212. lly helpful when you are trying to calculate complex timing information for effects loaded to a sub master Note If you adjust the rate on a submaster containing an effect the rate adjustments affect individual step timing but do not change the overall effect timing Rate is expressed as a percentage A submaster with a rate of 100 plays back at its recorded fade time A rate of 300 plays the submaster back three times faster than its recorded fade time A rate of 50 causes it to play back half as fast as its recorded fade time You may assign a rate of up to 2 000 percent To add a rate to submaster 7 follow these steps Action Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub 7 Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press S3 Rate Prompt reads Use keypad to select submaster rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Press 11 5 0 Corner reads Rate 150 5 Press Enter Rate of 150 percent is recorded into submaster 7 Specifying a submaster s page You may specify the page to which you record submasters For example if page 1 is loaded you can record a submaster to page 2 To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Create a look in Stage 2 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press Page 2 Prompt reads Select page on which to record submaster then press
213. lt level 18 Default Sneak Time 19 Dimmer 222 Dimmer levels 37 Master type 23 Record Lockout 334 Set Dimmer 336 Show name 27 System settings 15 Time 26 Time format 24 Setup 337 Sheet Sliders 20 Show Clear 195 196 Name 27 337 Show Labels 34 337 Show Suppress Labels 34 Slider Master 23 Sliders 20 SMPTE 241 Clear all 199 Copying events 250 Creating programs 243 Delete events 248 Editing events 252 Editing programs 248 Enabling port 242 254 Frame rate 242 Insert events 249 Installation 287 Interfacing with 287 Internal clock 313 Learn mode 246 Moving events 251 Pinout 287 Playing events External source 254 Internal clock 255 Manual 256 Print 190 Range editing 252 Reset Loop 247 SMPTE Time 337 Viewing events 255 Sneak 51 338 Default time 19 Softkeys 345 Flash 50 Quickstep 106 Select Group 111 Unload sub 140 Update 71 72 114 136 Solo 68 338 Solo record 109 Sort 338 Specifications 305 308 Split fade 64 Stage 59 338 Stage display 7 Print 182 Step 144 338 Creating 145 Delete 154 Editing characteristics 154 Effect 339 Element 147 Insert 153 SMPTE 338 Step Time 339 Subroutine 158 339 Time 144 Steps 144 Stop Printer 339 Strand CD80 41 Style 159 340 Style steps subroutine 340 Impression 2 user manual Sub 340 Sub Grandmaster 23 Sub List 340 Submaster 123 340 Bump buttons 129 340 Changing shows 126 Changing type 125 Clear 140 Clear all 196 Copy 138 139 Copy cue or group 139 Copy
214. may have Using Help Help screens are available for all Impression 2 keys including softkeys and wheels To display help screens press Help then press any key on the console Text conventions In this manual console keys are indicated by square brackets such as Enter Messages that appear on the console displays are printed in bold face such as Select channel References to other sections of the manual are printed in italics such as Chapter 1 Introduction Output level conventions In almost every case Impression 2 uses a highest level or pile on con vention to determine levels for channels affected by more than one out put Impression 2 reads all output levels it receives for a specific channel and sets that channel to the highest one A level setting entered on the keypad however takes priority over almost any other input For example if a channel is included in both a submaster and a cue that has played back and is in a fader Impression 2 sets the channel at the higher of the two levels You may then use the keypad to select that chan nel and set it to any level regardless of the levels set by the cue and the submaster chapter 1 introduction About Show About Show provides you with memory usage information regarding the currently loaded show It tells you how many channels and dimmers your show is configured for and how many of the available cues submasters groups macros and SMPTE events you are using
215. mbers chapter 12 effects 151 Using a random rate An effect with a random rate runs at varying speeds changing at random within a range that you select The console applies a random rate to the assigned step time and to the step fade times To assign random rate and to select your maximum and Minimum rates from 0 percent to 2 000 percent follow the steps below Keystroke Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Soft Displays available attributes across the keys S8 Attribute bottom of the screen 3 Press S7 Random Rate Prompt reads Select low random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Enter the slowest desired Prompt reads effect rate Press Enter Select high random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 5 Enter the highest desired effect rate 6 Press Enter Prompt reads Select step number Note You can control an effect s rate by adjusting the rate of the submas ter or cue in which the effect is recorded Adjusting the rate does not affect the overall Up Dwell Down times for the cue or submaster It does however speed up or slow down the individual steps For more information about controlling cue or submaster rates see pages 105 and 137 152 Impression 2 user manual Modifying effects chapter 12 effects Impression 2 allows you to modify recorded effects by adding or deleting effect steps changing step attributes and adding or deleting step e
216. mers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been recorded If you have multiple racks 24 dim mers in each rack are recorded simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system records 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Record Loads changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a Record Load operation that has already started press S7 Cancel Enter Follow these steps to Record Loads for your system Keystrokes Action 1 Set desired dimmers to a level above zero Only dimmers at levels above zero are recorded 2 Press Setupl Selects Setup display 3 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management display ment and press Enter Note If you wish instead of setting the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 5 Press S5 Record Loads Prompt reads Ifyou wish you may enter To record loads select dimmer s a specific dimmer or dim and press ENTER Enter 0 to record mers to record loads for all dimmers 6 Press 0 Enter Advisory reads New loads will be recorded for all dimmers with levels above zero Levels on stage will change while the Record Load is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Record Load The process may take several m
217. mmediately to their completed levels when you press Go or Back To enable Quickstep and run a cue check follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Stagel Press S7 More Soft keys S1 Enable Quick step Press Cue 1 Enter Press Go Continue to press Go until you have checked all cues Once you are finished press S1 Disable Quickstep Action Selects Stage display Turns on Quickstep Selects cue 1 Cue 1 comes up on stage instantly Each cue comes up on stage instantly Turns off Quickstep fades will operate normally Impression 2 user manual chapter 10 groups Impression 2 allows you to record frequently used combinations of chan nels into units called groups You may record up to 500 groups Once you record a group it can be combined with other channels and groups to create cues submasters effects or other groups The principal difference between a group and a cue is that a group cannot be played back through a fader or slider Consequently it has no fade times wait times or other playback attributes Group numbers are independent of cue numbers and may be numbered from 1 to 999 This chapter includes the following sections e Creating groups e Displaying groups on stage e Working with groups in Blind e Modifying groups e Labeling groups e Deleting groups e Copying groups e Using cues or submasters as groups e Using groups to modify cues groups or submas
218. mmers 00 000 cee eee eee 222 Working with Sensor backup l00kS 0 o o oooooooooo 223 Recording a backup look 000220200 0c eee 223 Playing a backup 00k 2 deuce tl eae ne flee 224 Error messages e an Sa ROA SES ARE wee oa SES 225 Disabling secondary Messages 0000000 226 Chapter 20 Control interfaces ss 227 AAA te a tlthod Sao Save betel Bae Se heated Ted 228 ETC NADI E alos siete de Neha fase POC yas a etd dy AN eles saul 228 MIDI Show Control MSC 0 0 0 eee 232 Real time clock oooooooooooc eee 236 DMX5 1 2 1NPUt Ss og ee Ot be ede dhe he A re GE ER 239 OMIPTIES 32 ocio De pis A e g de A IN A NE ote 241 Enabling S MPTEIADUT a ei e AEE ca a we EN 242 Creating SMPTE programs 0 000 cece eee 243 Editing SMPTE programs etere nri e ak ri eee 248 Playing back the SMPTE program 254 Remote macros cunda a o dis 257 Remote trigger 0 00 cece 258 Chapter 22 PNR ES Soca SE esi bl it aise Hh ads Caen ieee Gon BAI Picea 259 Parking GIMMEeS 3 2 vec as holes Rha eae ee PR 260 UAparkingsGiIMMelsS ss se 2 45 saddens omnis e Apt RS a ke 261 Parking channels 00 00 en eee eee eee 262 Unparking channel sri edn Seed te a eee eee ee 263 Parking groups cues and submasters 264 Unpark a group cue or submaster 265 ParkGISplay i toy 4 a tenes yo oaks ew ee oe pa aed bee ee 266 vil Appen
219. monitors show the same displays as the console s monitor See Appendix A Installation for information about installing remote mon itors This chapter includes descriptions of the following displays e Stage e Blind e Fader e Flexichannel e Tracksheet e Patch e Park e Playback Channel colors The colors in which channel numbers and output levels are displayed on screen provide information about the channels The following chart shows the meaning of colors in Stage Blind Fader and Tracksheet display modes Information on the use of colors in other display modes are included in their sections of this chapter Channel numbers Gray Unselected channel Yellow Selected channel Controlled by the wheel when Enter is pressed or when you move the wheel White Channel not selected by Only function Channel output levels White on Red Selected channel Level instructions from the keypad or the wheel affect this channel s level Yellow Channel output level was set by a submaster White Channel output level was set by an effect In Tracksheet and Blind white channel levels were set by an Allfade cue Gray Channel was recorded into a multipart cue but not in the currently displayed part Blind only ROG iipasi Channel has been de selected but its current level was established using the keypad Green Channel output level is c
220. mpression 2 user manual Inserting SMPTE events To add a new SMPTE event to an existing SMPTE program follow these steps chapter 20 control interfaces Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter Use the arrow keys to select event 4 The new event will be inserted before this event Press S7 until S1 reads Insert Event Press S1 Insert Event Press Enter Press 2 Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Corner reads Event 4 Prompt reads Select event number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select number of events to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Indicates that you wish to insert two new events Corner reads Insert 2 New events 4 and 5 are inserted all following events are renumbered 249 Copying SMPTE events Allows you to copy the selected event or range of events from one time slot and insert the copy in another Follow these steps to copy SMPTE events Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 3 SMPTE Selects SMPTE Events display mode Events and press Enter 3 Press S7 until S2 reads Copy Event 4 Press S2 Copy Event Prompt reads Select event number s to copy then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 1 Thru 5 Selects events 1 through 5 to copy 6 Press Enter
221. n ETC shall not be responsible for any incidental general or consequential damages damages to property damages for loss of use time prof its or income or any other damages Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s Name Manufacturer s Address 3030 Laura Lane The owner s obligations during the warranty period under this warranty are to notify ETC at ETC s address within one week of any suspected defect and to return the goods prepaid to ETC at their factory or authorized ser vice center THIS WARRANTY IS CONTINGENT ON THE CUS TOMER S FULL AND TIMELY COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF PAYMENT SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRAN TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR TICULAR PURPOSE AND OF OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES ON OUR PART THE OWNER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NO OTHER REPRESENTA TIONS WERE MADE TO HIM OR RELIED UPON HIM WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY AND FUNCTION OF THE GOODS SOLD This written warranty is intended as a complete and exclusive statement of the terms thereof Prior dealings or trade usage shall not be relevant to modify explain or vary this warranty Acceptance of or acquiescing in a course of performance under this warranty shall not modify the meaning of this agreement even though either party has knowledge of the performance and a chance to object Electronic Theatre
222. n Processor Board Revision 0 or B The Revision O or Revision B Main Processor Board appears in the con sole It contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit DIP switches ia 000 0000 Main Processor Revision ETC part number 4031B4006 REV O COPYRIGHT 1993 ETC INC MADE INTHE U S A Impression 2 user manual Node Board Revision A appendix a installation The Revision A Node Board appears in Remote Interfaces lt contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit and a set of 14 jumpers ETC part number Main Processor VSN JHL NI 3GVIN 211 913 8661 1yYBuAdoo V A3H tlovazs0or gt gt Revision o o SE ASE 00000000 Jumpers DIP Video card Video card switches Open Before you use the device on the ETCNet network set the ETCNet cabling jumpers to indicate what kind of cable the network uses To set the jumpers follow these steps 1 Locate jumpers 1 through 14 See illustration above 2 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC connector ThinNet install jumpers 1 through 6 Be certain jumpers 7 through 12 are not installed 3 If your network cable is plugged into the RJ45 connector Twisted Pair orthe DB15 connector ThickNet install only jumpers 7 through 12 Be certain jumpers 1 through 6 are n
223. n press Enter Impression 2 inserts a blank step before the selected step 162 Impression 2 user manual chapter 14 macros A macro allows you to record a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes This can simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can program up to 2 000 macros in Impression 2 depending on how large they are This chapter includes the following sections e Creating macros e Playing macros e Modifying macros e Clearing macros e Copying macros e Sample macros Creating macros There are two ways to create a macro You can create it in Macro display mode entering and editing keystrokes without actually executing the instructions or you can use Impression 2 s Learn mode to record a sequence of keystrokes as you perform the operation You can include any key or button on the console except Enter Macro in a macro You cannot enter slider settings or wheel movements Each macro can contain up to 50 keystrokes In addition you can link macros Using Learn Impression 2 s Learn function allows you to create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes Impression 2 records the keystrokes as you make them The recorded keystroke sequence can then be rerun by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit the sequence in Macro mode to adjust its operation Learn works in any display mode except the Macro Editing display and the De
224. n unexpected fluctuation of more than 20 per cent in the load on any dimmer a message identifying the dimmer and describing the problem is displayed in a window on one of the console s display screens Note Error messages are also displayed on the system s Sensor CEMs In order to monitor normal dimmer loads the system must first learn what constitutes a normal load Record Loads is the operation that allows you to teach the system what the range of normal loads is You may Record Loads either from the Impression 2 or from a Sensor AF CEM 03 55 PM Dimmer Recorded Load Actual Load Dimmer Recorded Lood Actual Load 4 OW 5 9004 OW 4504 OU 700W 9O0U You should run Record Loads any time you relamp your fixtures change the type of fixtures you are using change the dimmer numbering scheme or make any other significant changes to your system In general Record Loads should be the last step in setting up your system Loads are recorded from the Load Management display shown above Note Loads may not be recorded on Sensor systems without the AF option See the Sensor CEM Users Manual for more information on recording loads from your dimming system chapter 19 sensor dimming 213 214 Recording dimmer loads When you Record Loads the system records load information only for the dimmers set at a level above zero Choose the dimmers you wish to record set them to a level then run Record Loads Record Loads records 24 dim
225. nana ee 296 Installing Infrared Remote Focus Unit 297 Installing remote MACrOS n aeie es 298 Appendix B Error messages 0 00 IAS A OS RRR OR 301 Diskette error messages 000 ee ee 301 Other error MESSI ua 302 ELG EA kero oca cinta cada esa alles er 303 Appendix C Specifications bo A dar 305 Appendix D NT A A A bene KNEE a o e ene ker 309 Appendix E A O ae BS a 345 TIONG 0 89 EE een h et teow aath tank hy ke elh tae O 349 viii Impression 2 user manual chapter 1 introduction This chapter includes information to orient you to the console and the manual It includes the following sections e Troubleshooting e Using this manual e Using Help e Text conventions e Output level conventions e About Show Troubleshooting If you have problems with your console please refer to the manual or the console s Help function for instructions For more information about using Help see page 3 If you do not find the answer in the manual call your local dealer or ETC Technical Services Please have the following information available before you call e Console model and serial number located on back panel e Software version displayed on Setup menu e Options installed e Dimmer installation type e Dimmer manufacturer To reach the ETC Technical Services department call one of the numbers shown below After hours and weekend calls are answered electronically and forwarded to a se
226. nd Group Enter S2 Group List to display the Group List The Group List displays the group number and label of all recorded groups Up to 38 groups may be displayed at a time Use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to move forward and backward from page to page or use and to scroll through the groups The selected group is displayed in white and the selected field is highlighted in yellow other groups are dis played in gray 01 01 PM Label Group Label Misc Group Eric Group 121 122 Impression 2 user manual Chapter 11 submasters Impression 2 provides you with 24 submasters A submaster is a group of channels recorded at proportional levels and controlled by a slider and a bump button Submasters enable you to save complex looks you use fre quently and play them back manually They can also be used as building blocks when you create scenes cues or other submasters A channel may be included in any number of submasters You can record a total of 240 submasters 24 submasters in each of ten pages of sub master memory Each submaster consists of a slider and a bump button with one or two LEDs The slider allows you to bring the submaster look up manually The bump button allows you to flash the submaster to its full recorded level or to begin its programmed fade if it has one The green LEDs show you which sliders contain recorded submasters The red LEDs in the bottom row indicate whether the submas
227. nel outputs are limited to the level at which you set the slider An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls the levels of all channels Only submasters 13through 24 may be inhibitive An inhibitive submaster s LED is red Remember leave inhibitive submasters at 10 100 percent unless you want to inhibit channels Otherwise channels may be missing from your cues If channels are missing or channel levels have changed check your inhibitive submasters If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster its level will be displayed as a yellow zero appendix d reference 323 Insert Event Insert Event is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S1 Insert Event to insert SMPTE events between two existing events The events will be inserted ahead ahead of the selected event Insert Program Insert Program is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the Real Time Programs display Use S1 Insert Program to insert an empty program number ahead of the selected or specified program All subsequent programs are renum bered Insert Replace Insert Replace is softkey S2 in the Macro Editing and Designer s Worksheet Editing displays Press S2 Insert Replace to change the editing mode of the macro dis play Replace Mode overwrites macro entries and Insert Mode inserts new entries before the currently selected entry displayed in yellow
228. ng of the SMPTE program Press Enter Press S2 Clock Enable to start the internal clock running at the desired SMPTE time Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Prompt reads Set SMPTE internal clock then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields Each SMPTE event will run at its recorded time 255 Manual playback The Manual Mode Pause Mode and Step softkeys allow you to manually control playback of SMPTE events with no external SMPTE time input and without the console s internal clock Time allows you to select an event by specifying its SMPTE time Follow these steps to select and run SMPTE events out of recorded sequence Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 3 SMPTE Selects SMPTE Events display mode Events and press Enter 3 Press S3 Manual Mode Interrupts SMPTE input and resets the console to the first recorded SMPTE event Or Or Press S4 Pause Mode Interrupts SMPTE input at current SMPTE event 4 Press S5 Step Advances to the next recorded SMPTE event In Manual mode pressing Step starts with the first recorded SMPTE event 5 Repeat step 4 to advance sequentially through SMPTE events 6 Ifyou arein Manual mode Returns to normal operation and the press S3 Manual Mode flow of SMPTE code resumes If you are in Pause mode press S4 Pause Mode Note Always press S3 Manual Mode
229. ng with subroutines Effects An effect cue contains an effect Effects allow you to assign channels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order For more information on using effects see Chapter 12 Working with effects Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Record functions Impression 2 has two record functions Record and Track Record saves all channels as they appear on the screen what you see is what you get in the cue group or submaster you specify When you use Record to record a cue levels are recorded in only one cue Track is a record function that works only with cues It allows you to build a new cue from the previous cue s channel settings Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the next A track often runs through several cues for the length of a scene or an act Track also allows you to add tracked channels through existing cues For example if you have created all cues for a scene and then decide to add a few new channels to all cues or adjust the level of a channel throughout the cues Track lets you do so with one short record command To do the same thing with Record would require you to add the new channels to each cue individually Note When a channel level that tracks through a series of cues reaches an Allfade cue the track ends We use the standard Record function for all cues in this chapter
230. ngs up the channels in cue 3 as a group and sets them to 50 percent of their recorded levels Group Editing mode In Group Editing mode Impression 2 brings up the selected group itself and allows you to modify it In this mode use S1 Select Group rather than Group to bring up a different group Use Group to access a group s levels as you modify the selected group Group mode In Group mode Impression 2 brings up the channels from a group of your choice and allows you to use them to modify cues and submasters Group List Group List is softkey S2 in the Blind Group display Use S2 Group List to access the Group List display which provides a list of recorded groups and their labels Help Press Helpl followed by any key to receive a brief description of the key s function Hold Hold is softkey S2 in the Sub List display Press S2 Hold when entering Submaster bump button dwell fade times Hold causes a faded submaster to stay active until you press the bump button again A flashing LED indicates that a submaster is holding Hold causes an effect to hold until you press the clear button controlling the effect to fade the effect out Impression 2 user manual Hold fader Use the fader Hold to interrupt a fade Press Go to resume or Hold to cancel the fade execution Example Cuel 5 Go Hold Go starts cue 5 pauses it then resumes its fade Hold for Go subroutine A subroutine runs th
231. nt you want to create Highlight moves to the A B field Prompt reads Select SMPTE A B Cue Enters cue 1 for event 1 to play on the A B fader Highlight moves to the Rate field Prompt reads Select SMPTE A B Rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal Enters a rate of 125 percent of the recorded fade rate Corner reads Rate 125 Highlight moves to the C D field Prompt reads Select SMPTE C D Cue Moves the highlight to the Bump field Prompt reads Select submaster number for SMPTE bump event then press for ON or for OFF Prompt reads Select SMPTE Bump Rate 0 to 2000 100 normal Impression 2 user manual chapter 20 control interfaces 14 15 16 17 18 19 Press gt Press 5 Press gt Use an alphanumeric key board to enter a name for the event Press J and enter the SMPTE time to create the next event Repeat steps 4 through 18 until you have entered all your SMPTE events Leaves fade rate at normal and moves the highlight to the Macro field Prompt reads Select SMPTE Macro Selects macro 5 to run when event plays Moves the highlight to the Label field Prompt reads Enter SMPTE Label Prompt reads Select SMPTE Time Press TIME to edit specific fields 245 246 In Learn mode SMPTE Learn mode allows you to record macro keys submaster bump buttons and fader Go keys into SMPTE events as you press them Learn mode allows you to record a SMPTE prog
232. nu tions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management display ment and press Enter Note If you wish instead of setting the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 215 5 Press S4 Load Check Prompt reads You may enter specific To check loads select dimmer s dimmers to check and press ENTER Enter 0 to check loads for all dimmers 6 Press 0 Enter Advisory reads All dimmers with levels above zero will have their loads checked Levels on stage will change while the Load Check is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Load Check The process may take several minutes to complete Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel 7 Press Enter to proceed Loads are checked for all dimmers with the load check or with levels above zero press Clear to cancel the operation Once complete advisory reads Record Loads processing has completed Press any key to continue 216 Impression 2 user manual Clearing dimmer loads chapter 19 sensor dimming Clear Loads allows you to clear selected dimmer loads thus disabling dimmer monitoring for those dimmers This can be useful if you know that the load on a dimmer or group of dimmers will change over the course of a show and don t want to receive load error messages every time it hap pens To clear loads follow these steps Keystro
233. ode and time Keypad corner Indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Channel level display Current level of all channels Prompt area Information and prompts appear here Fader status Indicates current status of both fader pairs Shows cue running in fader fade times percentage of completion and follow times Attribute bar Shows current settings for selected cue group or submaster Softkeys Stage functions for S1 through S8 Cue List Lists all cues along with their attributes The next cue in the cue list is yel low This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind Blind The Blind display lets you work on cues without affecting the look on stage Grandmaster Display mode Keypad corner Grandmaster 100 02 03 Channel 26 27 x 31 3 34 gt 3 42 043 44 level display 067 68 091 92 Prompt area Fader Fader A B Fader C D Cue Type i Wait Link Follow Rate status Clear Clear A Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 1 T o2 21 3 Attribute bar EA 1 3 Guinin dz Toad exits 2 5 11 6 Sotkeys pat rre PP om ro Cue List Grandmaster Current Grandmaster setting Blackout alert and submaster page Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner Indicates how th
234. ograms display Use S1 Select Program to choose a program for editing Select Rack Select Rack is softkey S6 in the Rack Status display Use S6 Select Rack to select a specific rack on the Rack Status display Select Region Select Region is softkey S1 in the Designer s Worksheet Editing display Use S1 Select Region to access a macro for recording or editing Example S1 Select Region 6 Enter selects worksheet region 6 Selected channels Selected channels are channels over which you have immediate key board control You can modify selected channels with Full At IH or the fader wheel Selected channels are displayed in yellow and their levels are red on white You can select channels in most display modes Selected captured channels are live channels that are under immediate keypad control Channels can be selected and captured only in Stage modes You can select channels in Blind but they won t be captured since Blind mode is not live Press Rel once to release selected channels Set Clock Set Clock is softkey S2 in the Setup display Use S2 Set Clock to set the real time clock to correct time and date Set Dimmer Set Dimmer is softkey S7 in the ETCLink Functions display Use S7 Set Dimmer to set a dimmer or group of dimmers to a level at the rack ignoring any DMX512 levels This requires a system connected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system 336 Impression 2 user manu
235. operating the console This is done from the ETCLink Functions Menu For example if you are rehanging a show a large number of load errors will be generated despite the fact that nothing is actually wrong Under these circumstances you might want to turn off the secondary messages until the show is completely rehung and the new loads have been recorded This would allow the board operator to use the console uninter rupted Note See page 304 for a list of secondary messages To disable advisories follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 6 Display Advi Prompt reads sories and press Enter Enable disable display of ETCLink advisories 1 Enable all 2 Enable fatal error advisories only 0 Disable 4 Press 0 Enter All ETCLink advisories are disabled to enable advisories follow the same steps but select 1 or 2 in step 4 226 Impression 2 user manual chapter 20 control Interfaces Express allows you to control your console and or remote devices using a variety of external and timed interfaces This chapter describes the follow ing choices e MIDI e Real Time Clock e DMX512 Input e SMPTE e Remote Macros MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a digital communication pro tocol that allows you to interconnect Musical instruments and digital elec
236. orded inhibitive submaster the red LED lights Effect submaster An effect submaster has an effect recorded in it Press an effect submas ter s bump button or move its slider to start the effect running See Chap ter 12 Working with effects for more information on effect submasters Any submaster may be programmed with an effect If a submaster slider contains a recorded effect submaster the green LED lights 124 Impression 2 user manual Changing type chapter 11 submasters You can change a submaster s type by using the Type key When you change a submaster type levels recorded in the submaster are retained This means that you can change a submaster from pile on to inhibitive and back without losing any level or timing information If you change the type to effect channel and level information is erased To change a submaster s type follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number 3 Press Typel Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect 4 Press 1 2 or 3 to New type is entered in submaster select type status bar Type changes do not take effect while the submaster is active An active submaster s bump button LED blinks after you change its type To deac tivate it move its slider to zero if the green LED blinks or to 10 if the red LED blinks The LED then blinks to indicate t
237. ot displayed un less the fan is running Note Rack error messages appear beneath the ambient temperature 220 Impression 2 user manual Dimmer status The Dimmer Status display provides information about dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost Press Setup 9 Enter 3 Enter to access the Dimmer Status display Has errors Recorded Firing urve tack Slo Pan ic Boost Load Mode Mode Fee 12004 Feedback 650W Feedback 1200W Feedback 9004 eedback 9004 edback 39004 k 4504 k 7004 i OU k ow k OU k OW k OU k OW k OU k ou F F F F F F F F F F F F e Type shows the dimmer s amperage and whether the dimmer is high rise or standard Feedback indicates that the dimmers are Ad vanced Features modules e Recorded load displays the load at which the selected dimmer was recorded e Firing mode indicates whether the dimmer is normal multiplexed or switched indicates a normal firing mode e Curve indicates the output curve assigned to the dimmer equals 00 e Rack indicates the number of the rack where the dimmer is located e Slot indicates the number of the slot in the rack where the dimmer is located e Panic mode indicates whether the dimmer is assigned to a panic cir cuit indicates an unassigned dimmer e Boost indicates the dimmer s Boost level indicates a Boost level of 100 percent Up to 16
238. ot installed 4 Jumper 13 must always be off Jumper 14 should always be installed 271 Installing console and monitor Follow these steps to install Impression 2 and its monitor 1 Place console on a hard stable flat surface Leave at least six inches of space behind console for ventilation and cable clearance Console should be at least six feet from dimmers and high current AC lines Caution Do not leave the console in a road case tray or on a soft sur face This will inhibit proper ventilation 2 Move console power switch by fan on back panel to the Off position Older consoles may have a keyswitch power switch on the face panel If so insert the key into the power switch and turn it to the Off position 3 Connect the video cable from the monitor to the appropriate console connector labeled CRT 1 on the back panel 4 Insert the female end of the console power cord in the connector labeled Power in on the console s back panel 5 Insert the female end of the monitor power cord in the connector on the back of the monitor 6 Insertthe male end of the monitor power cord in the console connec tor labeled Switched AC Outlets The switched AC outlets provide the same voltage the console is plugged into 7 Insert the male end of the console power cord in a grounded 120 VAC outlet For 220 VAC operation consult ETC VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video Green video
239. ough out the ETCLink network Racks in configuration displays the total number of racks in the sys tem 219 Dimmer rack status The Rack Status display provides information about specified dimmer racks including rack type starting address port information voltage fre quency and ambient temperature Press Setup 9 Enter 2 Enter to access the Rack Status display Press S6 Select Rack Enter to select a specific rack to select the next rack or to view the previous rack 03 52 PM Rack 5 Rack Type Start Address Port A Type Rack Frequency Ambient Temperature 2 S3 S4 5 S6 S7 S8 System Dimmer Select Status Status Rack Return e Rack type displays the type of Sensor rack this rack is Possible rack types include SR6 SR12 SR24 SR36 SR48 SP6 SP12 SP24 SP48 and may be followed by AF if the rack is equipped with Sensor s Ad vanced Features option e Start address displays the lowest dimmer number in the rack e Port A B type indicates whether the port is normal or Multiplex indicates a normal port e Status indicates the present status of the port e Rack voltage displays the input voltage for each of the three phases A B and C Single phase racks only display values for A and C e Rack frequency displays the input frequency in hertz Hz e Ambient temperature displays the temperature of the air drawn into the rack by the rack s fan Ambient temperature is n
240. p of your choice and allows you to use them to modify cues submasters and other groups In Group Editing mode Impression 2 brings up the selected group itself and allows you to modify it Group mode To enter Group mode and bring up a group s channels follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Group 1 3 Press At 7 5 4 Press Record Cue 3 Enter Group Editing mode Action Selects Blind display mode Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Sets the channels to 75 percent of their recorded levels Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Records the current level settings as cue 3 To enter Group Editing mode and modify a recorded group follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Group 1 3 Press Enter 4 Add delete or modify channels as desired 5 Press Record Enter Action Selects Blind display mode Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Selects group 1 Group status bar appears above softkeys Channel levels are white Prompt reads Select channel numbers Records the modified group 1
241. play 221 DMX512 speed 276 DMX512 starting number 275 Error messages 225 Installation 274 Label 34 Loads 213 Monitor loads 213 Monitoring 211 Multiplex 40 275 Park dimmer 260 Patch 29 31 Pinout 274 Ports 275 Profile 35 Rack status 220 Record loads 214 Set 222 Setting 16 Strand CD80 rack 41 System settings 16 Unset 222 Dimming Sensor 211 DIP switch settings 269 Designer s Worksheet 283 ETCNet 294 Remote Video Interface 293 294 DIP switches 269 Disable Blackout key 21 Disable ETCLink 317 ETCLink messages 226 MIDI 317 MIDI Show Control 233 Record Lockout 24 Diskette 175 Directory 176 Drive specifications 307 Erase diskette 177 Error messages 301 Format 177 Management 176 Read all 179 Read system settings 179 Record show 178 Display Blind 8 61 Channel Attributes 45 Clear Functions 194 Cue List 76 Dimmer Status 221 Dimmer System Status 219 Diskette Functions 175 Fader 9 Group List 121 Groups 110 I O Configuration 275 Load Errors 218 Macro 166 Park 13 259 266 Patch 12 Print Functions 182 Rack status 220 Setup 337 SMPTE Edit 244 Specifications 306 Stage 7 59 System Settings 15 Impression 2 user manual DMX In 239 318 Enable 240 Fader display 239 Softkey 239 Starting channel 239 DMX512 275 276 Connectors 274 Mode 318 Pinout 274 Ports 275 318 Speed 276 318 Starting number 275 318 DMX512 Input 239 Down 343 Down Arrow 318 Dwell 144 323 Dwell time 1
242. press Sub or Group in place of Cue in step 5 Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Inserting cues You may want to insert a cue between recorded cues For example you may want to modify cue 1 slightly and insert it between cues 1 and 2 You can number cues with a one digit decimal Therefore you can insert up to nine cues between 1 and 2 1 1 1 2 etc Follow these steps to insert a cue between existing cues Keystrokes 1 2 Press Blind or Stage Press Cue and enter the number of the cue to mod ify then press Enter If you are working in Stage mode press Go Add or modify channels and cue attributes Press Record Enter cue number with a decimal to insert it between cues e g 1 L J 5 If you do not enter a new cue number you will overwrite the existing cue Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects the desired cue Brings up cue on stage and on the display Cue is modified Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 1 5 New cue 1 5 is recorded between cues 1 and 2 75 Cue List The Blind Cue List displays a list of the cues in your show Up to 18 cues are displayed on screen at any time The Cue List includes the cue number and type its upfade downfade and wait times its link and follow settings its rate and its label Press S2 Cue List in Blind mode to display the Cue Li
243. py 74 Copy to sub 139 Create loop sequence 67 Creating 58 Crossfade 56 Cue check 106 Cue List 76 Cue steps subroutine 315 Delete 74 Delete part 94 Effect 56 156 Follow 66 Go 102 Go to 103 Hold 102 Inserting 75 Label 69 210 Link to macro 67 Load to sub 139 Modify 82 Modify attributes 70 Modify live 70 Modifying channels 70 Multipart 91 95 329 Naming 210 Parked cue 264 Playing back 97 Print 183 Print cue list 186 Quickstep 106 Record 57 63 64 65 Record as effect 156 Record w default time 60 Record Blind 62 Select cue 98 102 SMPTE display 314 Solo 68 Specifications 307 Split fade time 64 Stage 59 Subroutine 56 Subroutine steps 158 Type 56 Update channels 71 72 Use as group 118 Viewing 58 Cue List 77 100 314 315 D Date 26 Days of week 315 316 Decimal point 315 Default Channel Submaster link 23 Fade Time 17 Fader Clear Time 18 Level 18 Sneak Time 19 Delete 315 Channel 95 Cues 74 315 Delete Macro 316 Delete Step 317 Effect steps 317 Entry 316 Event 316 Group 117 316 Macro 171 Part of multipart cue 94 316 Region 209 SMPTE events 248 Submaster 140 317 Designer s Worksheet 205 Clear 197 Clear Region 209 Copy Region 208 DIP switch settings 283 Installation 280 Programming regions 206 Setting options 20 Digitizer 20 205 Dimmer 317 About Dimmer 38 About Dimmer w ETCLink 39 Check loads 215 Clear loads 217 Dimmer check 37 Dimmer Status 317 Dimmer Status dis
244. r 0 7F vv Note on velocity 0 7F 00 Note off Control change message format lt Bn gt lt kk gt lt vv gt B Control change status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Control number 70 92 vv Control value 0 7F Program change message format lt Cn gt lt kk gt C Program patch change status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Program number 0 7F 230 Impression 2 user manual MIDI Message definitions Submaster bump switch execution Submasters 1 12 Submasters 13 24 C5 B5 C6 B6 Note C5 MIDI note 60 or middle C Cue execution in AB fader pair Program change 0 Program change 1 127 Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro ler change 70 ler change 71 ler change 72 ler change 73 ler change 74 ler change 75 ler change 76 Cue execution in CD fader pair Macro execution chapter 20 control interfaces Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Macros 1 127 Macros 128 255 Macros 256 383 Macros 384 511 Macros 512 639 Macros 640 767 Macros 768 895 Macros 896 999 Contro Control Control Control Control Control Control Control Control Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro ler change
245. r pushes the previously entered characters one space to the right Press Insert on the keyboard to switch between insert and overwrite mode See page 278 for information about installing an alphanumeric keyboard To name the show in your system follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press S1 Show Name 3 Enter the name you want to give the show on the alphanumeric keyboard The show name can have up to 20 characters 4 Press Enter on the alpha numeric keyboard to record the name or press Esc to quit and return to Setup display Action Selects Setup display Prompt reads Type show label F6 clear to end New name appears in corner of screen Show is named 27 28 Impression 2 user manual chapter 4 patch Before you begin creating cues for a show you should first create your patch The patch assigns individual dimmers to control channel numbers The Impression 2 Patch display allows you to assign up to 1 024 DMX512 dimmers to up to the maximum number of control channels your console can address You can use Impression 2 s default one to one patch or you may create a custom patch In addition Impression 2 s proportional patching capability allows you to set dimmer output levels and assign one of ten output pro files to dimmers If you are patching dimmers in a Strand CD80 dimmer rack see page 41 for special instructions Before patching be certain that the system settings r
246. r sr o a a A OO eke a aS e e ay 148 Effecttade times scx cto thw tow caus ee aaa 150 Using a random rate 2 02 2 ee 152 Modifying effects res creere ee eee 153 Inserting STEPS 2 2 he ee 153 Deleting StepSen coe ed epee dde 154 Editing step characteriStiCS o o o oooooooooooo 154 RUNNING an electo ied ne LP ee ES 156 Using an effect submaster n a annann aaea 156 Chapter 13 SUDIOUTNOS 2000 Shes A ba eA A eee bk eae DA 157 STEP SK RE SENERE SSG Whar CET Nas ia sn oie Oss Ath hte a a AAs BO 158 CUCISTEDS 2 eaten A a ple 158 COSSA tae eos r ona 158 Allfad 10 52 as p cies Lactic A Loge BASLE Dud ig Db 158 SVE SEPS stew ORKER DE tn RAS SNE RU ate di ak Gite ok cnt dy thes atte J 159 S bro tine attributes errer 8 eed Bela wo eS wl eee 159 Creating SubroutineS 2 eee 160 Editing asubroutine 0 0 2 0 cee 162 Deleting a step ey ues ee ee A ae eee IA 162 EA ecu ee welsh wea ge caret eee ta elle ch le DAEA 162 Chapter 14 Macross tanninen ie EA mas pal AVC ar talla ria 163 VE ATINGIM ACT OS ace tne esp ere re EEO CET Oe Ge ea at ea 164 Using Learnie oe BOA iced BES eee BRAGA Ee see St 164 Using Macro display mode nunnana 00000 c eee ee eee 166 Next MAC Os Sverige ha ew Sele Parga eee bee e ate 167 Macroiwaltec 2 a act lo aa O ENE ur OAR wee td 167 LINKING Macross sas Sead eee Pein Oe REA Ree we oe 168 Using submasters IN Macros 0 0 0 ccc eee 169 Playing MaC OS accio Fae Sate edn OR ee Peta aes
247. r than the active cue enter the desired cue number Press Channel Enter the channel num ber s you wish to add to or update in the cue Press Enter Or Press Track Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue bringing up its current levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking To cancel press clear Prompt reads To update channel s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press clear Updates and re records the active cue Note Press Track instead of Enter in step 7 if you wish changes to track into subsequent cues Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Using Update to modify fade rate You may also use the Update function to record manually modified fade rates into cues Follow these steps to update a rate for a cue running in a fader Keystrokes 1 Press Rate key for the fader in which the cue is running Move rate wheel to adjust fade rate Press S2 Update Press Enter Action Activates rate control Fades are placed under control of the rate wheel The Fader Status window shows the current rate Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in cue New rate is recorded into cue 73 74 Deleting cues Follow these steps to delete a cue in Stage or Blind mode
248. ram in the group must be specified The original spacing of subsequent programs is maintained Moving channels Moving channels are channel levels that change from one cue to the next In Stage mode all moving channels are displayed in green In Blind moving channels are displayed in green if they are moving down or blue if they are moving up Multipart cue A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information Parts accept most standard cue attributes with the exception of Follow and Label which apply only to the overall cue You may record a cue as a multipart cue or record it as a standard one part cue and split it later Each part of a multipart cue may consist of any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part of a multipart cue If you record a channel in a part and that channel is already included in another part the channel will be placed in the new part and be removed from the older part automatically Multiplex Multiplex is softkey S1 in the Patch and System Status displays S1 Multiplex allows a range of dimmers to be used with ETC Source Four multiplexers A and B outputs will be created for each multiplex dim mer which may be patched to discrete control channels Multiplex assign ments may be given only to dimmers on a DMX512 port that has been set for multiplex in the I O Configuration menu
249. ram live without concerning yourself with SMPTE time Warning If you use Learn to assign a cue to fader in which a cue already exists the previously recorded cue will be overwritten by the new cue Follow these steps to record a SMPTE event in Learn mode Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 3 SMPTE Selects SMPTE Events display mode Events and press Enter 3 Press S7 until S6 reads Learn Mode 4 Press S6 Learn Mode SMPTE Learn flashes in red in the upper left corner of the screen 5 Ifyou are going to use the The SMPTE internal clock in the upper internal clock to time the left corner of the display starts to run show press S2 Clock Enable to start the clock 6 Press Stage Selects Stage display 7 Ifyou are going to use external SMPTE to time the show start SMPTE data flow now The SMPTE port must have been enabled before you do this See External SMPTE source on page 254 for details 8 Select the cues submas ters and macros you want to record as SMPTE events 9 At the exact moment in Each button press is recorded as an the program that you want event in your SMPTE show each cue submaster or macro to begin press Go for the fader in which you want the SMPTE event to run the cue press the sub master s bump button or start the macro 10 Press Setup 1 3 Enter Returns to SMPTE Events display and S6 Learn Mode deactivates Learn
250. rammed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds 167 Linking macros Any macro may end with a link to another macro When macros are linked the first macro runs then the second macro follows automatically Press the appropriate macro key at the end of your sequence to create the link Pressing the macro key automatically ends and stores the macro For example to create a macro that sets all active channels to 50 percent fades them out then runs another macro follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 8 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press 1 Enter Selects macro 1 to create Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press MACRO ENTER when done Wheels and potentiometers are not valid entries in macros 3 Press Enter At 5 0 Sets all active channels to 50 percent Enter Macro line reads ENTER AT 50 ENTER 4 Press Macro Wait 1 0 Macro pauses for ten seconds Enter Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 5 Press Enter At 0 Fades all active channels out Enter Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER 6 Press M3 Stores macro Links macro to macro 3 Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER M3 Note You may also link a macro to a cue so the macro will run at the same time the cue does See Chap
251. rcent For example press Channel 1 Thru 5 Full to set channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to 100 percent Level Level sets selected channel levels to the output level assigned to the Level key The default value for Level is 100 percent See Chapter 3 Entering system settings page 18 for instructions on changing default settings For example if Level is set at 75 percent press 1 Thru 5 Levell to set channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to 75 percent Flash Flash sets the selected channel s level to 100 percent if the channel is cur rently at a level at or below 50 percent If the channel s level is above 50 percent Flash sets it to zero Levels set by Flash are only maintained while the key is pressed For example press Channel 5 then press and hold S8 Flash to set channel 5 to either 100 or zero Impression 2 user manual Sneak Sneak is a softkey that you can use to fade channels on stage to a level you choose in a specific time or to restore channels to the last level at which they were set with a fader or submaster For example if you bring up a cue then change the look you can use sneak to go back to the look created by the original cue If you do not indicate a time the sneak occurs in the default sneak time set in System Settings Follow these steps to use Sneak to set a channel level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press S1 Sneak Selects Sneak mode Promp
252. rding Macro 7 runs Channels 1 through 5 rise to 50 percent After five seconds channels 1 through 10 rise to Full After five seconds levels drop to zero Note If your macro needs to contain softkeys from display modes other than the Macro Editing display you must use Learn to create it 165 166 Using Macro display mode Macro display mode allows you to create or edit macros without affecting channel levels Softkeys Enter Macro and gt may not be entered in a macro in Macro display mode Insert Mode Operation s Macr dit 11 04 AM Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 0 Enter Enter Stage Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter Enter Stage Bump24 Setup 1 Enter 1 0 Enter DWS Sliders Stage M6 Bump1 Mwait O Bump2 Mwait 0 Bump3 Mwait 0 Bump4 Mwait 0 BumpS Mwait O Bump6 Mwait 0 Bump Mwait 0 Bump8 Mwait 0 Bump9 Mwait 0 Bump10 Mwait O Bump11 Mwait O Bump12 Mwait O Bump13 Mwait O Bump14 Mwai t 0 Bump15 Mwait 0 Bump16 Mwait 0 Bump1 Mwait 0 Bump18 Mwait 0 Bump19 Mwait 0 Bump20 Mwait 0 Bump21 Mwait 0 Bump22 Mwait 0 Bump23 M6 Setup 1 Enter PurgeF lexi Stage Macro Rep Ent Macro Softkey Follow these steps to create a macro to record a show to diskette Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 8 Macro Editing and press Enterl 3 Press 8 Enter 4 Press Setup 3 Enter 5 Press 1 Enter 6 Press Enter 7 Press Enter Macro Action Selects Setup display screen Selects Macro display scre
253. re unchanged Grandmaster 100 5 1 1 1 1 1 B Cue 11 Z e Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Complete 3 In 20 5 100 42 200 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 200 X 5 200 Sneok pd Sof tkeys Working with Flexichannel active differs from working without Flexichan nel in only one respect selecting channels See Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode on page 49 for more information Note In Tracksheet and Patch modes channels are highlighted if they appear in the Flexichannel list or are grayed out if they do not See Enable disable Flexichannel on page 22 for information on enabling Flexichannel Updating Flexichannel When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softkey on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays Impression 2 user manual Tracksheet The Tracksheet display shows you how your channel levels are tracking through your cues Display mode Keypad corner Channel 11 38 AM display line Channel 1 Cues 1 200 Cue display 2 a 35 Prompt area Softkeys chapter 2 monitor displays Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner This window indicates how the console will int
254. ress 2 0 Enter Action Selects the Setup menu Selects the Options Settings menu Selects the Powerup Macro option Prompt reads Select powerup macro number Enter 0 to disable Selects macro 20 as your powerup macro Each time you turn on the con sole macro 20 runs Impression 2 user manual Modifying macros Editing mode In the Macro mode display you can edit macros in Insert or Replace modes In Insert mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another key stroke Impression 2 inserts the new keystroke before the highlighted one In Replace mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another key stroke Impression 2 replaces the highlighted keystroke with the new one To switch from Insert mode to Replace mode press S2 Replace To switch from Replace mode to Insert mode press S2 Insert Impression 2 indicates the editing mode in the upper left corner of the command dis play Editing keys and gt move the highlight left or right when you are editing a macro S3 Delete entry deletes highlighted keystroke Clearing macros chapter 14 macros You must be in Macro display mode to clear individual macros To clear all macros you can use the Clear Macros option from the Clear Functions menu as described on page 197 To clear macros follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 8 Macro Editing Selects Macro display mode and press Enter
255. ress Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Soft Prompt reads keys S6 Delete To delete group press ENTER Group To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters group number to delete Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter to delete the Group 2 is deleted from your show group or Clear to cancel the action Copying groups You may make a copy of a group then use the copy as the foundation for anew group You can copy groups in Stage or Blind modes To copy a look from one group to another follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind or Stage Selects display mode 2 Press Group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press 1 Enters the number of the group you wish to copy Corner reads Group 1 4 Press Full Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit 5 Once the group is dis Prompt reads played press Record To record group select number and Group press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 5 Enters the number of the new group Corner reads Group 5 7 Press Enter Group copy is complete You can now modify the new group Note You may also copy a group s channels and levels to a cue or a sub master To do so press Cue or Sub in place of Group in step 5 chapter 10 groups 117 118
256. reverse S5 Build All elements are Off at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements On and leaves the previous step On At the end of the chase all steps are On they all turn Off to start the next pass In a negative effect all steps are On at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements Off and leaves previous step elements Off At the end of the chase all elements are Off they all turn On to start the next pass S6 Random A Random effect plays steps back in random order Random is ideal for creating lightning flashing or strobe effects 148 Impression 2 user manual chapter 12 effects Assigning attributes Follow these steps to assign attributes to the effect you created in the previous example Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Soft Displays attributes across the bottom keys S8 Attribute of the screen Prompt reads Select effect attributes 3 Select attributes from the Selected patterns are displayed at the softkeys on the screen top of the effects display Note To remove an attribute select It again 149 Effect fade times Each effect has an overall upfade dwell and downfade time When you create an effect cue the times default to the cue fade times in your system settings If you have not changed the default settings this means an upfade of five seconds a dwell
257. rokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 9 Flexichannel Prompt reads and press Enter Enable disable flexichannel 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 or 0 Corner reads Flexi 1 Or Flexi 0 5 Press Enter Flexichannel mode is enabled or dis abled Updating Flexichannel When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softkey on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays Impression 2 user manual Set Master type You may set the Master slider labeled Grandmaster on older Expression 2 line consoles to one of three control options e Disabled Master slider does nothing e Grandmaster Master slider controls all levels on stage except parked channels and independent channels e Sub Grandmaster Master slider controls all levels on stage set by submasters To configure your Master slider follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 1 System Settings Displays System Settings menu Enter 3 Press 1 0 Master Type Prompt reads Enter Select master type and press ENTER 0
258. rough steps until it reaches a Hold for go step It then pauses until you press Go In Dwell Out In Dwell Out is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect display Use S3 In Dwell Out to access the fade time field for selected step s The first time value is the fade in time the second is the dwell time and the third is the fade out time for the step Alternatively the arrow buttons can be used to move through the display Example Step 6 S3 In Dwell Out 1 gt 2 gt 1 sets an in time of one second a dwell of two seconds and an out time of one second for step 5 Independent Independent is softkey S1 in the Link List display Use S1 Independent to mark a channel independent Independent channels are not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash Independent channels An independent channel is not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash keys Otherwise independent channels function normally You may set a channel as independent in the Link List display Press Rell three times to release independent channels Inhibitive submaster Inhibitive submasters allow you to limit the intensity level for a group of channels An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it prevents channel outputs from exceeding a specified level When an inhibitive submaster is set at 10 100 percent channel output is not inhib ited As you pull the slider down chan
259. roup 10 to 50 percent Page Use Page to load a different page into the submasters Active submas ters will hold their current look until the associated slider has been returned to its home position zero for pile on or effect submasters 10 for inhibitive submasters Example Pagel 2 Enter loads submaster page 2 Park Park is softkey S6 in the Stage and Fader displays Press S6 Park set a dimmer channel or group at a specified level Parked dimmers channels or groups will remain at their park level until unparked Part Use Part to break a cue into multiple fades Each cue may contain up to eight parts A wait time may be assigned to each part to hold the start of that part A cue may be recorded as a multipart cue or may be broken into multiple parts at a later time A channel may be in only one part Example Stage 15 Record 5 Part 1 Enter records channel 15 s current level into part 1 of cue 5 Patch The Patch display provides a list of dimmer to channel assignments with associated proportional levels and profiles 330 Impression 2 user manual Pause Mode Pause Mode is softkey S4 in the SMPTE Events display Use S4 Pause Mode to interrupt the input of SMPTE time code with out resetting the SMPTE event list Press again to return to normal oper ation SMPTE events may be individually executed in Pause mode by pressing S5 Step Pause Printer Pause Printer is softkey S2 in t
260. roup and set their lev els 3 Press S2 Update Prompt reads Group To update group select number and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in group 4 Press 2 Selects group 2 to update Corner reads Group 2 5 Press Channel Prompt reads To update channel s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Specify the channels to Corner reads Chan 10 add In this case press 5 Thru 1 0 7 Press Enter Updates group 2 to include channels 5 through 10 Impression 2 user manual chapter 10 groups Using Update to change levels in a group Follow these steps to use Update to modify channels in a group Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Group 5 3 Press Full 4 Change the levels for the channels you want to modify in the group This process will not add new channels 5 Press S2 Update Group 6 To update only channels already recorded in the group press Only 7 Press 5 Enter Actions Selects Stage display mode Selects group 5 Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Brings group 5 s channels up on stage Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Selects channels and sets levels Prompt reads To update group select number and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in group Limits update
261. rs are recorded and whether the submasters in the bottom row are pile on or inhibitive A channel may be included in as many submasters as you choose You can record up to 24 submasters in each of ten pages of submaster mem ory for a total of 240 Submaster bump buttons Use a submaster bump button to drive the assigned channels to their recorded levels in the recorded fade time This button may also be used when recording a submaster look Example Record Sub Bump 4 records the current look into submaster 4 Example Update Sub Bump 1 records the channels in the current look that are also in submaster 1 at their current levels Impression 2 user manual Subroutine A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of existing recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that they have more playback options Subroutines and effects can create similar looks However subroutines have some advantages over effects Since each step of a subroutine is a cue with proportional levels you can create loops or chases with propor tional looks You can also create nested loops or even use an effect cue as a step in a subroutine Also since subroutine steps are actual cues there is no limit to the number of channels you can use Suppress Labels Suppress Labels is softkey S4 in the Patch display Use S4 Suppress Labels in patch mode to hide the display of the dimmer labels Softkey then reads S
262. rt cue The wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If no wait is recorded all parts run simulta neously when you press Go Follow these steps to assign a wait time to a part Keystrokes Action 1 Press Cuel then enter Selects cue number the cue number Prompt reads Select cue number 2 Press Part then enter Selects part number the part number Prompt reads Select part number 3 Press Wait 1 0 Selects wait time of ten seconds Prompt reads Enter wait time 4 Press Enter Sets wait time for the part to ten seconds Part will wait ten seconds then run Editing a multipart cue Once you have created a multipart cue you can add or delete parts add or delete channels from the parts change channel levels or change fade and wait times Deleting a part from a multipart cue Follow these steps to delete a part from a multipart cue in Blind Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Cue 4 Part 1 Prompt reads Select part number 3 Press S6 Delete Part Prompt reads To delete part press ENTER Delete part amp tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter Deletes part 1 from cue 4 Note If channels in your cue are tracking removing a part may affect sub sequent cues Press Track after you enter the part numb
263. rvice representative U S Electronic Theatre Controls Inc Technical Services Department 3030 Laura Lane Middleton WI 53562 Monday through Friday 8 00 AM to 6 00 PM CST 800 775 4382 608 831 4116 Europe ETC Europe Ltd Technical Services Department 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU 44 181 896 1000 Asia ETC Asia Ltd Technical Services Department Room 1619 20 Metro Centre ll 21 Lam Hing Street Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong 852 2799 9325 Impression 2 user manual Using this manual This manual provides instructions for using Impression 2 s features and optional accessories Setting up Impression 2 lf you are setting up the system for the first time chapters 3 and 4 and appendix A instruct you in installing and configuring Impression 2 If the system is already in place you May not need to refer to these chapters New users If you are new to lighting consoles or to Impression 2 in particular read chapters 5 through 11 for instructions on setting channel levels and using cues groups and submasters These are the building blocks for creating and running any show Once you are comfortable with these functions chapters 12 through 14 provide more advanced information on effects subroutines and macros Experienced users Once you are familiar with the system refer to Appendix D Glossary and the console s Help function for answers to any remaining questions you
264. s Enter To clear groups press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Groups cleared Returns to Setup menu 195 196 Submasters Clear Submasters erases all recorded submasters from a show To erase all submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 4 Clear Submas Prompt reads ters To clear submasters select page and press ENTER 0 All pages 4 Press Enter Submasters cleared Returns to Setup menu Show and Patch Clear Show and Patch erases all information associated with a specific show from your console s memory including patch information and system configuration information To erase a full show and patch follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 5 Clear Showand Prompt reads To clear show Patch Enter and patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Show cleared Returns to Stage display mode Impression 2 user manual Designer s Worksheet Designer s Worksheet erases all regions from the Designer s Worksheet layout Macros assigned to the regions are not erased To erase all regions follow these steps
265. s Enter upfade wait time Or Enter downfade wait time Enters a wait time of six seconds Corner reads UpWait 6 Or DnWait 6 Records cue 5 with wait time of six seconds 65 Recording cues with Link and Follow When you record a cue it automatically becomes part of the Cue List The Cue List is a list of all cues organized in numeric sequence Normally when you press Go to execute cues Impression 2 plays them back in the sequence in which they appear in the Cue List Link allows you to modify the sequence in which cues play back Follow allows you to play back multiple cues automatically Link Normally pressing Go plays back cues in the sequence indicated on the Cue List Link allows you to play back cues out of sequence by linking them together For example if you link cue 6 to cue 2 then play cue 6 pressing Go plays cue 2 Follow these steps to record a linked cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Cue 6 Selects cue 6 3 Press Link Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO 4 Press 2 Enter Links cue 6 to cue 2 After you play back cue 6 press Go to play back cue 2 Note You can also link cues to macros For more information on linking cues to macros see page 168 in Chapter 15 Working with macros Follow Follow allows you to play a series of cues automatically The Follow time in
266. s The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected submaster You may record all levels on Stage into the sub master or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the submaster Note When you use Update to modify a submaster the updated submas ter takes control of all stage levels for channels in the submaster Follow these steps to update a submaster Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Set submaster 6 s slider Puts submaster 6 s current look on to 10 7 stage 3 Select and set desired Selects channels and sets levels levels for channels to update in the submaster 4 Press S2 Update Sub Prompt reads To update submaster s select number s and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in submaster s 5 To update only the chan Limits update nels already recorded in submaster 6 press Only 6 Presssubmaster6 sbump Submaster 6 is updated button T Note If you do not set the slider to 10 Impression 2 will update the sub master proportionally This means that the outputs on stage will match their current level only when the slider is at its current position For example if the slider is at 50 percent channel 7 is on stage at 25 per cent and you press Update channel 1 is set so that when the slider returns to 5 channel 7 returns to 25 percent This means th
267. s Dim 1 Prompt reads Select dimmer level Press FULL button for 100 Prompt reads To unpatch dimmer for dimmer check press ENTER To park or unpark dimmer s press PARK Dimmer 1 is set at 75 percent Dimmer Check window appears Prompt reads Press or to step through dimmers Press Clear to cancel dimmer check Dimmer 1 returns to zero dimmer 2 is set at 75 percent Note If a dimmer is parked the Dimmer Check window displays the level at which it is parked The Dimmer Check does not change its level on stage Note To check a multiplexed B dimmer enter the number selecting the A dimmer then press to select the B dimmer chapter 4 patch 37 About About provides you with information about dimmers The following pages describe the use of About Dimmer and the information available in the About Dimmer window Note See page 53 for information on using About Channel About Dimmer About Dimmer provides attribute and status information for a selected dimmer To display the About Dimmer window follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press About Dimmer Prompt reads About Select dimmer number then press ENTER 2 Press 6 Keypad corner reads Dim 6 3 Press Enter About Dimmer window is displayed About Dimmer 15 abel Channel 15 Proportion 100 Profile 0 ole dimmer lev e Label The dimmer s label e Channel The channel to which the dimmer is assigned
268. s Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press Channel 1 Corner reads Chan 1 3 Press and hold S8 Flash Sets channel 1 s level to 100 percent if its current level is at or below 50 percent or Sets channel 1 s level to zero if its current level is above 50 percent 4 While holding S8 press Flashes each channel in turn or to select the next or previous channel 5 Once you have checked all the channels release S8 Flash Note You may start a channel check with any channel Substitute the desired channel in step 2 Note If a channel is Independent it will not Flash Impression 2 user manual About About provides you with information about channels The following pages describe the use of About and the information available in the About channel window Note See page 38 for information on using About Dimmer About Channel About Channel provides attribute and status information for a selected channel To display the About Channel window follow these steps Keystrokes Action i 2 3 Press About Channel Prompt reads About Select channel number then press ENTER Press 6 Keypad corner reads Chan 6 Press Enter About Channel window is displayed Press Clear to remove the window About Channel 1 chapter 5 setting channel levels Label The channel s label Attributes Whether or not the channel is
269. s Bis Sheet Sliders Return 11 Select one of the displayed options either on the console keypad or by selecting F2 F3 or F4 on the Worksheet template button bar then press Enter 12 Press S1 Sheet Console Sliders to enable slider control from either the digitizer or the console 13 Touch the pen to the digitizer region labeled Calibrate or F1 14 Follow the instructions on the screen that direct you to touch the pen to the regions labeled A B and C Designer s Worksheet DIP switch settings Three sets of DIP switches are located on the back panel of the Kurta IS ONE Designer s Worksheet These DIP switches need to be set as shown below for the digitizer to function properly The Kurta XGT Designer s Worksheet does not have DIP switches Note These settings are different from those used with old Expression line consoles To change the DIP switch settings find the switches and adjust the set tings as shown on the illustration and chart below The Designer s Worksheet checks DIP switch settings when unit is turned on You must restart the unit for new DIP switch settings to take effect Switches are either Up On or Down Off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set Down Down Down Down Ur Up Ue UP Sote Down Up Down Up Down Down Up Up serc Up Up Down Down Down Down Up Down 283 Installing Remote Focus Unit The Remote Focus Unit RFU allows you to set channel levels check dim
270. s Stage or Blind Press Channel Press 2 0 Press Thru Press 3 0 Press Solo Move fader wheel press Full Level or or use At and numeric keypad to set levels for selected chan nels Press Record Press 7 Press Enter Press Solo Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select channel numbers Enters channel number to mark the start of the selected range Indicates you are selecting a range of channels Selects channels 20 through 30 Sets all channels other than 20 through 30 to zero Prompt reads To restore levels press SOLO Select channel numbers Sets channels 60 through 70 to a new level Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 7 Records cue 7 with channels 60 through 70 Restores channels other than 60 through 70 to previous levels Warning If you press Solo in Stage mode unselected channels control ling lights on stage will go to zero 68 Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Labeling cues Impression 2 allows you to use an alphanumeric keyboard to assign labels to cues Labels can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long See page 278 for informa tion on installing an alphanumeric keyboard Follow these steps to label a cue Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue 1 2 Label
271. s chapter includes the following installation procedures Installing your console Installing your monitor Connecting your dimmers System configuration Installing the alphanumeric keyboard Installing a printer Installing Designer s Worksheet Installing Remote Focus Unit MIDI SMPTE ETCNet Installing remote video monitors Installing Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU Installing Remote Macros An illustration of Impression 2 s back panel is included on the next page Operating instruction for optional accessories are included in Chapter 18 Accessories Impression 2 back panel SMPTE Switched 3 pin female XLR accessory outlets 1 024 DMX outputs 5 pin female XLR So RFU AC DMX In female XLR 6 pin female XLR Hens 5 pin male XLR p j EDILES Ko de TE O Obo E TJ U Digitizer Remote Go MIDI In Out F SA VGA CRT output 25 pin female D 5 pin female DIN RS 232 15 pin female mini D ETCNet _ hi ar ralla Parallel Printer twisted pal pele 5 pin female DIN 129 Pin female D 268 Impression 2 user manual DIP switches and jumpers Several components of the Impression 2 system contain DIP switches which mu
272. s erases all SMPTE information from a show To erase all SMPTE events follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 4 Clear Func tions Enter 3 Press 1 3 Clear SMPTE Events Enter 4 Press Enter chapter 17 clear functions Action Displays Setup menu Displays Clear Functions menu Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER Prompt reads To clear all SMPTE events press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR SMPTE events cleared Returns to Setup menu 199 Reset system Reset System erases all show information from the console resets your patch and resets all configuration information to factory defaults To reset Impression 2 follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press S1 Reset System Prompt reads To clear entire system and reset to default settings press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter System resets and returns to Stage mode display 200 Impression 2 user manual chapter 18 accessories This chapter includes instructions for working with the following Impres sion 2 accessories e Remote Focus Unit RFU e Infrared Remote Focus Unit IRFU e Designer s Worksheet e Alphanumeric keyboard For accessory installation instructions see Appendix A Installation For
273. s level reverts to the level the console is currently assigning it Unpark a dimmer To unpark a dimmer follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Dim 3 Enter the dimmer number to unpark and press Rel Unpark all dimmers Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark Unparks the dimmer To unpark all parked dimmers follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Dim 3 Press Rel 4 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark Prompt reads To release all parked dimmers press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Unparks all parked dimmers 261 262 Parking channels To park a channel indicate the channel you want to park and the level at which to park it Once it is parked nothing you do at the console will have any effect on lights in that channel except for Blackout until you unpark the channel When channels are parked the monitor displays a message at the top of the display that says Park Enabled Note If a dimmer is parked and the channel that controls it is also parked the dimmer s parked level takes priority over the channel s parked level If the dimmer is then unparked it will revert to the channel s parked level To park a channel follow these steps Ke
274. s set Note To enter a level between one and nine percent you must press zero then the number For example to set the default level to five percent press O 5 in step 4 Setting default fader clear time Pressing the Clear key above one of the fader pairs clears the cue from the fader fading all channels in that fader to zero The default fader clear time determines the fade time for both Clear keys Channels black out immediately when clear time is zero Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to set a new default fade time Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 5 Default Fader Clear Time and press Enter 4 Press 9 to enter the time value you wish to assign 5 Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter default fader clear time Corner reads Time 9 New default time is set to nine seconds Impression 2 user manual Setting default Sneak time chapter 3 system settings Sneak allows you to fade or restore channel levels on stage in a specified time The console allows you to assign a default Sneak time For more informa
275. s you to use the fader sliders to take manual control of fade levels When you take manual control of cue playback moving the fader slider controls the fade Leave the fader sliders at 10 before pressing Go to play cues back as recorded When you move the fader sliders below 10 the cue runs until it reaches the slider setting You can set the slider before you play the cue or move the slider after the fade starts The fade stops when it reaches the slider s level and the slider then controls the fade For example if you set the slid ers at 8 the cue will play until it reaches 80 percent of its recorded levels then give you manual control Set the sliders at O before you press Go to take manual control of fade from the beginning of cue Hint If you start a cue and the performers skip ahead to the next cue you have two options for speeding up to the next cue If you do not need the current cue to reach its full intensity level settings press Go to inter rupt the current cue and begin the next one However if you need the cur rent cue to reach its full level settings push the sliders down to the lit LEDs and then back up to 10 immediately Then press Go to start the next cue Once the fade is complete the cue is no longer controlled by the fader Impression 2 user manual Rate override chapter 9 playing back cues Manual override allows you to control both the fade s rate and percentage of completion When you pla
276. select submasters to print Prompt reads Select submaster page to print then press ENTER 1 Page 1 2 Page 2 0 All pages Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all submasters or select 1st submaster to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print submaster or select last submaster to print File sent to the printer 185 186 Cue List Cue List prints a list of cues recorded in the currently loaded show as well as all cue attributes Cues are listed by number To print a full cue list print out follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 5 Print Cue List Prompt reads Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation Group List Print Group List prints a list of groups recorded in the currently loaded show Groups are listed by number Information provided includes each group s label To print a full group list printout follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 6 Print Group Prompt reads List Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation Impression 2 user manual Submast
277. show Each page is displayed separately with up to 18 submasters on screen at any time The Submaster List includes the submaster num ber its bump button status its current level on stage its upfade down fade and dwell times its type its rate and its label Submasters with recorded levels pile on submasters are displayed in green inhibitive submasters in red and effect submasters in white Sub masters with no recorded levels are displayed in gray As you scroll through the submasters the currently selected submaster s attributes are highlighted in white and the currently selected field is highlighted in yel low Use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to move through the list within each page of submasters Follow these steps to display Submaster List Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage S7 More Displays Submaster List page 1 Softkeys S2 Sub List 2 Press Page 2 Enter Switch from Blind submaster page 1 to page 2 3 Press Page 1 Enter Switch from Blind submaster page 2 to page 1 chapter 11 submasters 141 142 Editing attributes in Submaster List The Submaster List allows you to edit any attributes shown on the list across a range of submasters simultaneously For example you can assign a five second wait time to submasters 1 through 5 in one command Follow these steps to do so Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Sub S21 Displays Submaster List Sub List 2 Press 1
278. signer s Worksheet Editing display To create a sample macro using Learn follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Live display mode 2 Press Learn Prompt reads Select macro number to learn then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 7 Enter Learning Macro 7 flashes in red in the upper left corner of the monitor Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros 4 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 5 at 50 5 At 5 Enter percent 5 Press Macro Wait Prompt reads Enter wait time Press ENTER when done 6 Press 5 Enter Inserts a five second wait into the macro Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros 7 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 10 at Full 1110 Full 8 Press Macro Wait Prompt reads Enter wait time Press ENTER when done 164 Impression 2 user manual chapter 14 macros 9 Press 5 Enter 10 Enter Channel 1 Thru 1110 At 0 Enter 11 Press Enter Macro 12 Press M 7 Enter Inserts a five second wait into the macro Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros Sets channels 1 through 10 at zero Concludes macro reco
279. sliders to manually control the cue allowing you to fade the effect up and down with the playback slider Note Press the fader s Clear key twice to cancel an effect from the fader immediately Using an effect submaster An effect recorded to a submaster interacts with cues and other submas ters on a pile on basis Bring up the effect by pressing the submaster s bump button or raising the slider An effect submaster fades proportionally between zero and the effect s high level The slider acts as a master If the effect s low level is normally 10 percent moving the slider to 50 percent will reduce the effect s low level to 5 percent Note See Adding a rate to a submaster on page 132 for information on changing the rate of a submaster 156 Impression 2 user manual Chapter 13 subroutines A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that they have more playback options You can use subroutines and effects to create similar looks However subroutines have some advantages over effects Since each step of a sub routine is a cue with channels set at proportional levels you can create loops or chases with proportional looks In an effect channels are assigned to steps but no levels are assigned Thus all channels in a step are at the same level You can also create nested loops or even use an effect cue as a step in a subroutine This chapter
280. specifically addresses the channel Effect cue An effect cue contains an effect Effects allow you to assign channels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order Effect submaster An effect submaster contains an effect Effects allow you to assign chan nels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order Play the effect by pressing the submaster bump button or by raising the submaster slider Enable ETCLink Enable ETCLink is softkey S1 in the ETCLink Functions display Use S1 Enable ETCLink to allow dimmer monitoring on a system con nected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system Softkey then reads Dis able ETCLink Enter Use Enter to advance the operator prompt or terminate verify selected console functions Example Record 6 Enter records cue 6 Example Load Sub 5 Group 6 Enter Enter Macro Use Enter Macro to terminate the recording of a macro instruction This is the last step in recording a macro whether in Learn mode or blind Macro Edit unless an instruction to run another macro is used to termi nate recording Example Learn 9 Enter Record Cue 5 Except Sub 1 Enter Macro records macro 9 appendix d reference 319 Except Use Except to exclude channels dimmers or groups from selection or record operations Example Record
281. st 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete 7 More Softkeys gt Stage 8 DMX In Cue List 1 a 2 Pi 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 8 Return gt Blind Cue Group List gt 3 x 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Group 7 x 8 Return gt Group Sub List 1 Bump Status 2 Hold 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 8 Return Submaster 346 Blind Cue Effect 1 Step 2 Cue List gt Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 More Softkeys Effect 2 8 e Blind Sub Effect 1 Bump Status 2 Sub List Sub List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 More Softkeys Effect 2 8 Blind Subroutine 1 Step 2 Cue List gt Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 More Softkeys gt Subr2 8 Fader 1 Select Fader 2 Update 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Park 7 More Softkeys Fader 2 8 Tracksheet 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page Patch 1 Multiplex 2 A 3 B 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Unpatch 7 Profile 8 Show Hide Labels Effect 2 Attributes 1 Step 1 Positive Negative 2 Step Time 2 Alternate 3 In Dwell Out 3 Reverse 4 Low High 4 Bounce 5 Insert Step 5 Build 6 Delete Step 6 Random 7 More Softkeys gt Ef
282. st A sample Cue List display is shown below 01 00 PM Cue Type Up Down Ja i Link 1 2 Follow this example to modify a cue in Cue List display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press S2 Cue List Displays Cue List 3 Use the keypad to enter Selects desired cue s the cue s to modify Use Prompt reads And Except and Thru Select cue number s to select multiple cues 4 Press gt until the cursor The prompt indicates your options or reaches the attribute you prompts you to enter a new setting wish to edit 5 Enter the new setting for Setting change is reflected on cue list the attribute and press Enter Impression 2 user manual chapter 6 cues Editing cue attributes in Cue List The Cue List allows you to edit attributes across a range of cues simulta neously For example if you wanted cues 1 through 5 to have upfade wait times of ten seconds you could set them all in one command Follow these steps to do so Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind S2 Cue Displays Cue List List Prompt reads Select cue number s 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Selects cues 1 through 5 3 Press Wait Prompt reads Enter upfade wait time 4 Press 1 0 Enter Sets upfade wait time for cues 1 through 5 to 10 77 78 Impression 2 user manual chapter 7 track Track record function Track record allows you to record cues and modify recorded cues Addi tionally it a
283. st be set properly in order for the system to function properly The DIP switch settings for the following components are listed in this appendix along with instructions for changing them New DIP switch set tings take effect when you turn on the console Setting DIP switches Impression 2 checks DIP switch settings when the system is turned on You must restart the console for new DIP switch settings to take effect Switches are either On Closed or Off Open Two varieties of DIP switch are used in the Impression 2 In one the switches extend above the surface of the unit You May use your fingers to set these switches The other contains switches that are recessed into the unit You will need to use a pin or other fine pointed object to change the switch settings Setting jumpers appendix a installation A jumper is a small plastic connector used to join a pair of pins sticking out of a printed circuit board The jumper is installed when it covers both pins It is not installed when it covers one or none of the pins see illustration below Jad Jumper Jumper not installed installed 269 270 Circuit boards Impression 2 components use one of two main circuit boards Consoles contain a Main Processor board part 4031B4006 Remote Interfaces con tain a Node board part 4052B4014 The circuit board may be identified by the part number and revision printed on the board Illustrations of the two boards follow Mai
284. st of programs recorded in the cur rently loaded show The printout provides complete information about the programs To print a full list of programs follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup Menu 2 Press 5 PrintFunctions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 2 Print Real Prompt reads Time Programs Enter Press ENTER to print all program events or select first program number to print 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation SMPTE events Print SMPTE Events prints a list of events recorded in the currently loaded show The printout provides complete information about the events To print a full SMPTE program follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 3 Print SMPTE Prompt reads Events Enter Press ENTER to print all SMPTE events or select first event number to print 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation 190 Impression 2 user manual Tracksheet chapter 16 printing Print Tracksheet lists channel tracking information from your Tracksheet To print a track for any channel follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3
285. step 6 Impression 2 user manual Sample macros chapter 14 macros To create these sample macros go to Macro display mode Setup 8 Enter select a macro and enter the keystroke sequences as shown below More sample macros created by Expression style console users are available on ETC s World Wide Web page at the following URL http www etcconnect com html service_macros html Channel check This macro brings each channel up to full for a channel check Before you begin you ll probably want to bring up at least one channel for working light then clear all other channels from stage Press Stage and start macro Press macro key again to check each subsequent channel At 0 Enter Full Macro line reads At 0 Enter Full Auto channel check This macro automatically runs through each channel with a two second wait between each channel To pause the check press Macro Wait To resume macro press macro key again At 0 Enter Full Macro Wait 2 Enter M Macro line reads At 0 Enter Full Mwait2 M this macro s macro number Turn off all lights except work lights This macro captures all channels and sets them to zero This overrides all faders and submasters Then the macro sets work lights at full You can easily return to previous settings by pressing Rell to release captured channels Channel 1 Thru 7 At 0 Enter Channel Full Macro line reads Chan 1 Thru
286. strokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 6 Options Set Selects Options Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Press 5 SMPTE Input Prompt reads Enter Enable disable external SMPTE input 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter External SMPTE is enabled When the console detects SMPTE data it will automatically run the SMPTE program If external data is not detected and the internal clock is disabled the message Waiting for input appears above the SMPTE list To run the SMPTE program start the flow of external SMPTE data Setting SMPTE frame rate The SMPTE frame rate may be set to 24 25 or 30 frames per second 30 frames per second is the default To change the frame rate follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 6 Options Set Selects Options Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Press 6 SMPTE Frames Prompt reads Select SMPTE frames Per Second Enter per second then press ENTER 1 30 fps 2 25 fps 3 24 fps 4 Press 2 Enter SMPTE frame rate is set to 25 fps 242 Impression 2 user manual Creating SMPTE programs The console allows you to create SMPTE programs in the SMPTE Events display or in Learn mode Event 1 e 30fps 00 07 03 00 16 In the SMPTE Events display use the four arrow keys to move the yellow highlight around the screen Press lt or gt to move the highlight
287. t board Impression 2 user manual appendix a installation DIP switch and jumper settings The Remote Interface s Main circuit board contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit at location S1 and a set of 14 jumpers at location J22 In order to activate the Remote Interface you Must first adjust the settings on these jumpers and switches 1 2 Remove the screws that secure the top panel Raise the top panel to expose the internal circuitry Locate jumpers 1 through 14 location J22 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC connector ThinNet install jumpers 1 through 6 Be certain jumpers 7 through 12 are not installed If your network cable is plugged into the RJ45 connector Twisted Pair orthe DB15 connector ThickNet install only jumpers 7 through 12 Be certain jumpers 1 through 6 are not installed Jumper 13 must always be off Jumper 14 should always be installed Locate the DIP switches at location S1 on the corner of the circuit board nearest the power switch Switches are either On Closed or Off Open DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the Remote Interface will not start Adjust the settings as necessary to match the table below DIP Switch Position Function Off Open Normal operation Factory Use On On Closed Normal operation Factory Use On Off Open Normal operation Factory Use On Off Normal operation Factory Use On Off Normal operation Factory Use On Off Open Normal op
288. t Full Actual load The actual load currently on the dimmer Boost The dimmer s boost level if any Dimmer error Current dimmer errors if any 39 40 Multiplexed dimmers ETC s Multiplex dimming technology can increase the capacity of your dimming system The ETC Multiplexer converts the output of a single ETC Sensor or L86 dimmer into two separate signals Both signals then pro vide discrete levels for two ETC Source Four lighting fixtures Warning The DMX512 port that serves the dimmer must be in multiplex mode Setting the port to multiplex mode erases your current patch Set the port mode BEFORE you create your patch To set the port s mode see Setting Multiplex mode on page 276 Before you create your patch you must identify any dimmers whose sig nals are multiplexed Impression 2 indicates the split by adding an A or B to the dimmer number Follow these steps to multiplex a dimmer Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 If the Dim LED is unlit Prompt reads press Dim to indicate that Select dimmer numbers then press the next number entered ENTER to assign to a channel or will be a dimmer press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 3 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads the desired dimmer num Select dimmer numbers then press ber s Use And and Thru ENTER to assign to a channel or if you want to select more press AT to assign a level or press t
289. t Therefore if you don t hold the bump button for the duration of the upfade time channels do not reach their full recorded levels Note If you do not enter a dwell time for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell Manual Mode Manual Mode is softkey S3 in the SMPTE Events display Use S3 Manual Mode to interrupt the input of SMPTE time code and to reset the SMPTE event list to the first recorded event Press again to return to normal operation SMPTE events may be individually executed in Manual mode by pressing Step Minus Use to decrease the selected number by one Example Cue 4 selects cue 3 Example Dim 6 At 7 5 patches dimmer 6 at 73 percent More Softkeys More Softkeys is softkey S7 in many displays When a display has more than eight softkeys the console displays a softkey labeled S7 More Softkeys Press S7 to display additional Hore softkeys Sof tkheys Move Event Move Event is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the SMPTE Events display Use S3 Move Event to move a group of SMPTE events The target time of the first event in the group must be specified The original spacing of subsequent events will be maintained 328 Impression 2 user manual Move Program Move Program is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the Real Time Programs display Use S3 Move Program to move a group of programs The target time of the first prog
290. t at any time while print ing To stop the printer temporarily while it is printing press S2 Pause Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops and waits Press S2 again to resume printing To cancel a print job press S1 Stop Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops Stage display Print Stage display prints channel settings as they currently appear on Stage To print a Stage display report follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 Print Stage Dis Prompt reads play Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation Impression 2 user manual Cues chapter 16 printing Print Cues prints a list of cues recorded in the currently loaded show Cues are listed by number Information provided includes all cue attributes and levels of all channels included in each cue To print a full list of cues follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 2 Print Cues Enter Press Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1st cue number to print Prompt reads To confirm
291. t before Prompt reads Select number of programs to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Inserts two new programs before program 4 All following programs are renumbered 237 Copying real time programs Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 2 Enter 3 Press S7 More Softkeys S2 Copy Program 4 Press 1 Thru 5 Enter 5 Press 7 0110 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to copy then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to copy Prompt reads To copy selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new program starting at 7 00 AM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time Moving real time programs You may move one or more real time programs from one time slot to another To move a single program you may also use the arrow keys to highlight the time for the program you want to move use the keypad to enter the new time then press Enter Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 2 Enter 3 Press S7 More Softkeys S3 Move Program 4 Press 1 Thru 5 Enter 5 Press 5 0 0 Enter 238 Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press
292. t cue number to print 2 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads the first group in the range Press ENTER to print cue or select you wish to print Press last cue number to print Enter 3 Use the keypad to enter File sent to the printer the last group in the range you wish to print Press Enter 184 Impression 2 user manual Submasters Print Submasters prints full information about all 240 submaster memo ries Submasters are listed by number Upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels are included in the printout Levels of all chan nels included in each submaster are also provided To print a full list of submasters follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 4 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 4 Print Submas ters Enter Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all submasters or press PAGE to select submasters to print File sent to the printer To print a partial subMaster list follow these steps Keystrokes 1 chapter 16 printing Press 4 Print Submas ters Enter Press Pagel Press 0 1 or 2 then press Enter Use the keypad to enter the first submaster in the range to print Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the last submaster in the range to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all submasters or press PAGE to
293. t reads Sneak mode Select channels then press ENTER to sneak or AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 3 Select the channel s you Selects channel 5 Sets level at 50 want to sneak and the percent level to which you want it Prompt reads to fade For example Sneak mode Select level press 5 At 5 4 Press Timelandenterthe Selects Sneak time of ten seconds time for the sneak For Prompt reads example press Time Sneak mode Select time 11 0 5 Press Enter Fades channel 5 to 50 percent over ten seconds Follow these steps to restore a channel to its last fader or submaster level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sneak and select Selects channel 5 to sneak the channel s you wantto Prompt reads Sneak mode Select restore For example channels then press ENTER to press 5 sneak or AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 2 Press Enter Fades channel 5 back to its most recent cue or sub level Note Press Sneak Enter to restore all channels to their current fader or submaster levels chapter 5 setting channel levels 51 52 Channel check Use a Channel Check to check which channel controls which light Impression 2 allows you to check channels by selecting a single channel and setting it at a level Once you have selected a channel you can then advance sequentially through the channels checking one at a time Follow these steps to run a channel check Keystroke
294. t starting number 275 276 Setting Multiplex mode If your console is controlling an ETC Sensor dimming system that utilizes ETC s Multiplex dimming specify this in the I O Configuration screen Warning Changing a port to or from Multiplex mode resets your patch To configure your system for the type of fixtures you have follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S1 DMX512 Port enter the port to configure port 1 or 2 and press Enter You may also use J to select a port 4 Press S2 DMX512 Mode 5 Press 1 to set the port for Multiplex mode or 0 to set the port for normal mode 6 Press Enter twice to confirm your choice 7 Console indicates mode as either Normal or Multiplex Note If you use multiplexed fixtures you cannot set the ports starting DMX512 numbers Setting DMX512 speed If your console is controlling a dimming system that requires a slower DMX512 signal specify this in the I O Configuration screen Impression 2 is designed to run at the highest rate provided for in DMX512 specifications Some dimming systems including some Color tran ENR dimmers may require a signal slower than the full DMX512 specification If this proves necessary you may reset the console s signal speed Speed choices are Slow Medium Fast and Max Impression 2 normally runs at Max If you have problems with
295. te then move the wheel to adjust the fade rate of the cue in the A B fader Record Use Record to save all cue submaster or group information in console memory Example Record 6 Time 3 Enter records cue 6 and sets its fade time to 3 seconds Example 1 Thru 6 Record Sub Bump 1 records channels 1 through 6 to submaster 1 Record Backup Record Backup is softkey S3 in the System Status display Use S3 Record Backup to store a recording of a selected look on stage in a Sensor CEM You may record up to 32 backup looks Record Loads Record Loads is softkey S5 in the Load Management display Use S5 Record Loads to record load information for all dimmers set at a level above zero Choose the dimmers you wish to record set them to a level then run Record Loads appendix d reference 333 334 Record Lockout You may set the console to disable the Record function This protects a finished show from inadvertent changes To disable the Record function in your system press Setup 1 Enter 1113 Enter 1 Enter Recorded channels Recorded channels are channel levels that have been recorded in a cue group or submaster In Stage mode recorded levels are displayed in green or magenta Recorded channels may be either moving or tracked in Blind mode Channel levels controlled by effects are displayed in white Except for effect submasters channel levels controlled by submasters are displayed
296. ter Channel 7 is added to element list Prompt reads Select step numbers 6 Press Record Enter Records your changes to the cue Note If you enter elements without using And or Except the channels or groups you enter replace the current element list Deleting elements To remove a channel or group from a step follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Select the step you wish Prompt reads to modify using I and T Select step numbers or press S1 Step and enter the step number 3 Press Enter Except Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step 4 Enter the channel or group Prompt reads number to remove Select channel numbers 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Select step numbers 6 Press Record Enter Records your changes to the cue chapter 12 effects 155 Running an effect cue Play back effects recorded as cues on the console s A B or C D faders just as you would any other cue The effect will run using the cue s Up Dwell and Down times to determine how long the cue lasts To run the cue press Cuel enter the effect cue number and press Go An effect cue with a Hold dwell time runs on the fader until you press that fader s Clear key to begin the downfade Press Clear once to fade out an effect cue in the recorded downfade time You may use the playback
297. ter 6 Working with cues for more details 168 Impression 2 user manual Using submasters in macros Submaster bump buttons can function in macros in three different ways as a normal bump button to always fade a submaster to full regardless of its current condition or to always fade a submaster out regardless of its current condition To include a bump button that starts a timed submaster or changes the direction of a running fade press the submaster bump button while pro gramming the macro Use S1 On Sub Bump to fade the submaster up regardless of its cur rent setting Use S2 Off Sub Bump to fade a submaster out regardless of its current setting To create a macro that turns a submaster on for five seconds then turns it off follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 8 Enter 2 Press 4 Enter 3 Press S7 More Soft keys S1 On Sub Bump 4 Press 3 Enter 5 Press Macro Wait 6 Enter 5 and press Enter 7 Press S2 Off Sub Bump 8 Press 3 Enter 9 Press Enter Macro 10 Press Stage M4 chapter 14 macros Action Selects Macro editing mode Selects macro 4 to create Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros Macro line reads OnBump Prompt reads Enter submaster number Macro line reads OnBump3 Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 0
298. ter the cue starts before the next cue runs Follow plays back the next cue on the Cue List unless you use Link to specify a different sequence To remove a follow time from a cue press Follow Clear Example Cue 1 Follow 1 Enter assigns a follow time of one second to cue 1 Cue 2 will start one second after cue 1 starts Full Use Full to assign a level of 100 to a dimmer channel or group Example Channel 1 Thru 1110 Full sets channels 1 through 10 to 100 percent Go Press Go to execute the next cue in the key s associated fader Example Cue 1 A B Go runs cue 1 in the A B fader appendix d reference 321 322 Groups Impression 2 allows you to record frequently used combinations of chan nels into units called groups You may record up to 500 groups Once you record a group it can be combined with other channels to create cues submasters effects or other groups The principal difference between a group and a cue is that a group cannot be played back through a fader or slider Consequently it has no fade times wait times or other playback attributes Group numbers are independent of cue numbers and may be numbered from 1 to 999 Group Use Group to select record or recall a proportional group of channels Cues and submasters may also be recalled as groups Example Record Group 1 Enter records the current look as group 1 Example Group Cue 3 at 5 0 bri
299. ters e Only e Group List Creating groups You can create groups in Stage Blind and Fader modes To create a group follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display mode 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Full 6 Selects channels 1 through 9 and sets Thru 9 At 5 Enter them at proportional levels 3 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 1 5 Press Enter Records group 1 Creating a group from the look on stage To create a group from the look that s already on stage follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter Records group 2 Impression 2 user manual chapter 10 groups Creating a group using Solo To create a group using some of the channels on stage but not all record the group using Solo To do this select the channels to add to the group then press Solo Follow these steps to create a group containing channels 5 through 20 when channels 1 through 25 are active on stage Keystrokes 1 2 8 Press Stage Press 1 Thru 2 5 Full Enter 5 Thru 2
300. ters are pile on green or inhibitive red This chapter includes the following sections e Submaster types e Submaster pages e Playback Submaster List e Submaster LEDs e Submaster bump buttons e Recording submasters e Creating inhibitive submasters e Modifying submasters in Blind e Modifying submasters in Stage e Using Update to modify submasters e Live control of a submaster e Controlling submaster fades manually e Labeling submasters e Copying submasters e Loading cues or groups to submasters e Copying cues or groups to submasters e Clearing submasters e Submaster List Submaster types Submasters can be pile on inhibitive or effect Pile on submaster A pile on submaster consists of channels recorded at proportional levels If a pile on submaster s channel levels are higher than established channel levels the submaster s levels take precedence except as noted below If they are lower the established levels take precedence If a submaster slider contains a recorded pile on submaster the green LED lights Note Channel levels set on the keypad and inhibitive submasters both override pile on submaster levels Inhibitive submaster An inhibitive submaster holds the output of channels below a specified level An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it just prevents them from exceeding a specified level Only submasters 13 through 24 may be inhibitive If a submaster slider contains a rec
301. the A B fader the right window monitors the C D fader The display counts down wait times for cues and indicates which step is running when an effect is active The illustration below shows where each piece of information appears Fader Cue in fader Dw Hold Downfade information or effect step Upfadeinformation or effect fade times 101 102 Selecting and playing a cue Selecting a cue Moves it to the top of the Cue List It will not run until you press Go Follow these steps to select a cue and play it on the fader of your choice Keystrokes 1 2 Go Press Stage Press Cue Press 1 5 Press Enter Press Go on fader A B Press Go on fader C D Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 1 5 to play Cue List moves cue 1 5 to the top of the list Cue 1 5 runs on fader A B Cue 2 moves to the top of the Cue List Cue 2 starts to run on fader C D Each fader has its own Go key Press Go to play back the cue selected on the Cue List If you have pressed Hold to interrupt the playback of a cue press Go to resume the fade If you press Go before a cue finishes playing the previous cue stops and the new cue begins from the levels at which the previous cue was inter rupted Hold Each fader has its own Hold key If a cue is running press Hold to pause playback of the cue Press
302. them at a lower level Dimmer intensity levels set in Patch function at full level on all other screens For example if you enter a level of 60 for a dimmer on the patch screen when you set that channel to full in a cue or submaster the dimmer will output at 60 percent Follow these steps to assign a proportional dimmer output level Keystrokes 1s 2 Press Patch If the Dim LED is unlit press Dim to indicate that the next number entered will be a dimmer Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer Press At Use the keypad to enter the desired maximum output level for the dim mer s Full is displayed until a new level is entered Enter a zero before single digit levels i e 08 Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer level Dimmer s proportional level is set Note If the dimmer s level is highlighted white on red you may use and to adjust the level Press Enter to record the edited level Impression 2 user manual chapter 4 patch Unpatching individual dimmers Channel zero is not an
303. through 1 954 M allows you to enter any other macro To access other macros press M enter the desired macro number and press Enter Fader controls The fader control keys allow you to play back cues in the console s cross faders Go controls the AB fader pair the remaining keys function as on the console keypad Other controls The remaining controls enable you to select dimmers channels groups and cues Keys function as they do on the console keypad Connector Connector for hard wire connection to receiving unit Press On key on the infrared controller to turn power on The unit shuts off after three minutes if no key is pressed The unit is powered by a 9V size PP3 battery Console controls and the infrared controller may operate simultaneously Changes made from both console and infrared controller are displayed immediately on the console monitor Impression 2 user manual Designer s Worksheet Designer s Worksheet gives you control of the console from remote loca tions such as in the house on the set or backstage The Designer s Work sheet is a digitizer tablet that emulates the console face panel and provides user definable regions All functions may be selected using the stylus supplied with the Designer s Worksheet If you have not yet installed your Designer s Worksheet see Appendix A Installation Three digitizer templates are avallable The correct template for your worksheet depends on your dig
304. through 5 Selects the first cue Assigns a follow time of five seconds to the first cue Assigns a follow time of five seconds to the remaining cues Selects the last cue in the playback loop Creates a loop by linking the last cue to the first cue Note You may also use effects to create loops See Chapter 12 Effects for more information Using Link to link a macro to a cue Link allows you to automatically run a macro when a cue runs If you want the macro to delay before running start the macro with a Macro Wait of the desired length See Chapter 14 Macros for information about creating macros Follow these steps to link a macro to a cue Keystrokes 1 R 4 Press Stage or Blind Cue 6 Press Link Press Enter Macro Press 7 Enter Action Selects display mode Selects cue 6 Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO Prompt reads To link to macro select macro number To link to cue press CUE Records cue 6 linked to macro 7 When you press Go to play cue 6 macro 7 will run at the same time 67 Recording a cue using Solo Solo lets you record a cue that contains some of the channels that make up the current look but not others Often you will create cues by adding to subtracting from and modifying previously recorded cues Follow these steps to create a cue using Solo Keystrokes Ti 2 10 11 Pres
305. times and rates that apply to the effect overall Attributes Attributes control how the effect plays its steps Press S7 More Soft keys S8 Attribute to reveal the attribute softkeys Assign attributes using the following rules e All effects are either Positive or Negative When you initially create an effect it defaults to Positive e Alternate Reverse Bounce and Build can be applied in any combina tion to a Positive or Negative effect e Random can be applied to any Positive or Negative effect Random may not be combined with Alternate Reverse Bounce or Build Note In the following descriptions On means elements are set to their high level Off means they are set to their low level S1 Positive In a positive effect all elements start Off Each step turns its assigned elements On and the previous step s elements Off S1 Negative In a negative effect all elements start On Each step turns its assigned elements Off and the previous step s elements On Note S1 Positive Megative switches back and forth between positive and negative S2 Alternate The effect alternates between positive and negative chases through the steps The first pass is positive if the effect is positive negative if the effect is negative S3 Reverse Steps run in reverse numerical order S4 Bounce Steps run first in forward then in reverse order Sub sequent passes alternate between forward and
306. ting Clock 26 Time format 24 System Status 219 341 T Technical Services 2 Template 20 Text conventions 3 Thru 341 Time 26 341 Default Sneak 19 Effect fade time 150 Effect In Dwell Out time 144 Effect Up Dwell Down 150 151 Follow time 66 Format 24 Macro Wait 167 Set system 26 Submaster 129 132 Wait 65 Wait time in multipart cue 94 Timed fader 99 Track 57 79 80 81 342 Tracked channels 44 342 Tracksheet 79 88 Display 11 342 Print 191 Troubleshooting 2 Type 342 Changing sub 125 Cue 56 Submaster 124 Type Level 342 U Unload submaster 140 Unpark channel 263 Unpark dimmer 261 Unpatching dimmers 342 Unset Dimmer 222 343 Up Arrow 343 Up Down Follow 343 Update 343 Cue 71 72 Flexichannel 10 49 Groups 114 Rate 73 Submasters 136 V Viewing cues 58 W Wait 94 Multipart 96 Wait time 343 Record cue 65 Wheel 344 Level 50 355
307. to a submaster from Stage or Blind mode To add fade times to a submaster follow these steps in either mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Subl Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 2 Press 5 Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 3 Press Timel Prompt reads Enter upfade time 4 Use keypad to enter Prompt reads upfade time and press Enter dwell time Time Press CLEAR for hold press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation 5 Use keypad to enter dwell Prompt reads time and press Time Enter downfade time See next page for infor mation about using a Hold dwell 6 Use keypad to enter down New fade times are recorded into fade time and press submaster 5 Enter Note Once a timed submaster is running press the bump button to change the direction of the fade For example if the upfade is half fin ished pressing the bump button starts the downfade from 50 percent If a downfade is running pressing the bump button begins an upfade again from the current level 130 Impression 2 user manual Hold dwell time If you record a submaster with a dwell time of Hold the submaster fades up when you press the bump button then holds until you press it again To add a dwell time of Hold to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 2 Press 5 Selects submaster 5 Corner rea
308. to other page 137 Default match to channels 23 Dwell times 129 Hold 131 Manual 131 328 Effect 124 156 Except 133 Fade times 129 130 137 Home position 124 In macros 169 Inhibitive 124 134 323 Label 138 Labels 138 LEDs 126 127 134 List 137 141 Live edit 135 Load cue or group 139 Load effect 156 Manual control 137 Manual fade 137 Manual time 131 Modifying 135 Naming 210 Override fade time 137 Pages 126 132 Park 264 Pile on 124 Print 185 Print submaster list 187 Range edit in Submaster List 142 Rate 132 137 333 Record 129 Recording 132 Sliders 137 156 Specifications 306 Submaster display edit 135 Submaster List 141 142 Time 137 Types 124 Update 136 Use as group 118 index Subroutine 56 157 341 Allfade cue steps 158 315 Attributes Follow time 159 Level 159 Bounce style steps 159 311 Creating 160 Crossfade cue steps 158 315 Cue steps 315 Deleting step 162 Down 343 Editing 162 Follow 343 Hold for go style steps 159 325 Inserting step 162 Jump to cue style steps 159 325 Level 342 Loop style steps 159 327 Steps 158 339 Style steps 159 340 Type 342 Up 343 Suppress Labels 341 System configuration 275 System settings 15 Default fade time 17 Default Fader Clear Time 18 Default level 18 Default Sneak Time 19 Designer s Worksheet op tions 20 Flexichannel 22 Name show 27 Number of channels 16 Number of dimmers 16 Record Lockout 24 334 Set Channels Subs 1 to 1 23 Set date 26 Set
309. tronic equipment such as lighting control consoles If you are not familiar with MIDI and would like more information on how it works Control Sys tems for Live Entertainment by John Huntington includes several sec tions that deal with the subject Impression 2 supports two versions of MIDI In addition to ETC MIDI a proprietary MIDI implementation developed by ETC you may also use the entertainment lighting industry standard MIDI Show Control 1 0 MSC ETC MIDI The console both transmits and receives MIDI messages with any MIDI instrument The MIDI protocol can operate cues macros and submaster bump switches ETC assumes that MIDI users have a working knowledge of MIDI This section provides ETC MIDI interface information message formats and message definitions See Installing MIDI on page 285 for installation infor mation If you need more technical information about MIDI contact ETC Note Macros cannot execute MIDI commands 228 Impression 2 user manual Configuring ETC MIDI chapter 20 control interfaces The console must be configured to operate in MIDI mode If you have any questions about this please contact your dealer or ETC Once the console is on the MIDI Channel must be set Select 1 ETC MIDI Channel in the Options Settings menu The console operates at all times in MIDI Mode 3 or Omni off Poly This means it only receives or transmits MIDI commands on the user selected channel The Select MIDI Channel
310. ts display mode Selects field to edit Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Prompt reads Select SMPTE event number The first rate field is highlighted Prompt reads Select SMPTE A B Rate Sets the rate to 50 percent Impression 2 user manual chapter 20 control interfaces Or for example if you wanted to move ten events five seconds later in order to insert a new event into the middle of a program you could do so by following these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 3 SMPTE Events and press Enter 3 Press S7 until S1 reads Select Event 4 Press S1 Select Event 5 Press 1 1 Thru 2 0 6 Press S2 SMPTE Time 7 Press Time Time 8 Press five times 9 Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects SMPTE Events display mode Prompt reads Select SMPTE event number The time field is highlighted Prompt reads Select SMPTE Time Press TIME to edit specific fields Selects the seconds field for all ten events Prompt reads Select SMPTE seconds Each time you press the seconds field for each event increases by one second Sets the new times 253 Playing back the SMPTE program The console allows you to play recorded SMPTE events in several ways You may use any external source of SMPTE data to run the program you may run the program using the console s built in SMPTE clock or you may play individu
311. tus 220 332 Random 332 Random Rate 152 332 Range edit Effect steps 147 Group List 77 SMPTE events 252 Submaster List 142 Rate 333 Override 105 Random rate 152 Rate fader 332 Rate SMPTE 333 Submaster 132 137 Update 73 Wheel 333 Real Time Clock 236 Real Time Programs 236 Clear all 199 Print 190 Record 333 Cue 57 62 63 65 Cue w split fade time 64 Effect as cue 156 Follow 66 Group minus sub 109 Groups 108 Loads 214 Record Backup 333 Record Lockout 24 Recorded channels 44 Show to diskette 178 Solo 68 Sub minus sub 133 Submasters 128 129 Track 57 Record Loads 333 Record Lockout 334 Recorded channels 334 Region Clear 209 Clear all 197 Copy 208 Programming 206 Release 334 Remote Focus Unit 202 Remote Interfaces 288 296 Remote macros 257 299 Pinout 299 Remote Trigger 258 Remote video 296 Remote Video Interface 292 DIP switch settings 293 294 Replace Insert 334 354 Reset Loop 247 334 Reset patch 198 Reset System 200 334 Return 334 Reverse 335 RFU 202 284 Connector 284 Installation 284 Pinout 284 Right Arrow 335 S Select Cue 98 335 Select Dimmer 335 Select Event 335 Select Fader 335 Select Group 335 Select Macro 335 Select Program 336 Select Rack 336 Select Region 336 Selected channels 44 336 Selecting channels 49 Sensor 40 211 213 Backup looks 223 System status 219 Set Channel levels 43 50 52 Clock 26 336 Date 26 Default fade time 17 Default fader clear time 18 Defau
312. ubmasters are collections of channels with associated control instructions Impression 2 allows you to park the channels used in groups cues and submasters at a specified level ignoring their recorded levels For example if all your worklights are recorded in a group you could park that group rather than parking all of the worklight channels indi vidually Park a group To park the channels in a group follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Group 3 Enter the group number and press At 4 Enter the level at which to park the group s channel Action Selects Live display Prompt reads Group mode Select group number then press AT to park or press Release to unpark Selects the group to park Prompt reads Group mode Enter intensity Parks the channels at the selected level Park a cue or submaster To park the channels used in a cue or submaster follow these steps pressing either Cue or Sub respectively in step 2 Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Cue 3 Enter the cue number and press At 4 Enter the level at which to park the cue s channel 264 Action Selects Live display Prompt reads Group mode Select cue number to use as group then press AT to park or press Release to unpark Selects the cue to park Prompt reads Group mode Enter intensity Parks the channels at the selected level Impression 2 user manual
313. ue on the cue list runs in the A B fader If a cue number is sent the specified cue runs on the A B fader If a cue number is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry that cue runs on the C D fader If cue 0 is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry the com mand presses C D Go The pending cue runs in the C D fader You may also press A B Go by sending Go Cue 0 1 Stop The Stop command by itself holds all fades in both fader pairs If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only the cue running in the A B fader holds If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue running in the C D fader holds The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Resume The Resume command by itself resumes all holding fades in both fader pairs If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only a cue holding in the A B fader resumes If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue holding in the C D fader resumes The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Fire The Fire command executes a specified macro Macro number must be in the range 1 127 If no macro is spec ified or if the macro number is out of range the com mand is ignored 234 Impression 2 user manual MSC commands transmitted by Impression 2 chapter 20 control interfaces MIDI Show Control MSC allows
314. ult times See Setting default fade times on page 17 No wait time will be recorded Follow these steps to assign fade and wait times to parts in a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Enter the cue number Press Part then press or until the part you want to edit is displayed Press Time Enter an upfade time between 1 second and 99 59 minutes and press Enter If you want a downfade time that is different from the upfade enter the desired time and press Enter If not just press Enter Press Wait Enter wait time and press Enter Wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If you do not enter a wait time Impres sion 2 assigns a wait time of zero Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Select part number Prompt reads Enter upfade time Prompt reads Enter downfade time Fade times are set for the part Prompt reads Enter wait time Wait time is set for the part Impression 2 user manual chapter 2 playing back cues Impression 2 has two timed faders that allow you to play back recorded cues Cue selection and playback can be automated or you can control them manually Faders LO LO LO O Lo Lo evel ree Back tea ra EX A B C D
315. use 274 Impression 2 user manual System configuration Once your console is installed you may need to reset some hardware configuration settings The Input Output Configuration screen allows you to reset the DMX512 starting numbers for your DMX512 ports set your ports for ETC Multiplex dimming and adjust the DMX512 signal speed if your dimming system requires a slower signal 09 16 AM DMX512 Ports Operating Mode Starting DMX512 Number Norma I E 2 Norma I 513 Current DMX512 Transmission Speed Max Mode Start Speed Return Setting DMX512 starting numbers appendix a installation When you install your Impression 2 the console sets the starting dimmer number for DMX512 port 1 to 1 and DMX512 port 2 to 513 If you prefer you may set different starting numbers for the DMX512 ports For exam ple if your system included 10 racks each with 96 dimmers you could set the ports to start at 1 and 481 This would avoid having any rack receiv ing signals from two ports If you do so you will need to specify this in the I O Configuration screen To reset DMX512 port starting dimmer numbers follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press J to select the port to configure port 1 or 2 4 Press S3 DMX512 Start 5 Enter the desired starting number for the port 6 Press Enter twice to confirm your choice 7 Display indicates por
316. uts are limited to the level at which you set the slider An inhibitive submaster set at 10 100 percent does not affect channel out put An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls the levels of all channels Note If channels that you expect to see on stage are missing or at the wrong levels check to see if a submaster is inhibiting them If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster ts level will be displayed as a yellow zero Follow these steps to create an inhibitive submaster Keystrokes 1 Press Stagel Actions Selects Stage display 2 Press Sub and enter the Selects sub to change number of the submaster Prompt reads 13 to 24 you wish to be Select submaster number inhibitive To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press Typel Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive Other types are Blind only 4 Press 2 LED flashes Channel levels change to IN and the green unless slider isat submaster number is red zero 5 Move slider to zero LED Pile on levels are unloaded flashes red 6 Move slider to 10 Inhibitive control is loaded Follow the same procedure to convert back to pile on 134 You may include the same channel in more than one inhibitive sub master If you press an inhibitive submaster s bump button the submaster fades from its current slider location to zero and back using its record ed f
317. utton in Solo mode brings its chan nels to their recorded level and reduces all other channels to zero If a submaster s bump button is disabled or in Solo mode a D or an S appear next to the submaster s number on the Submaster List and the Status Bar To set a bump button s status follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Sub 5 Selects submaster 5 3 Press S1 Bump Status Prompt reads Select bump status and press ENTER 1 enabled 2 disabled 3 solo 4 Press 2 Selects disabled The keypad corner indicates the choice you have made 5 Press Enter Submaster 5 s bump button is disabled 128 Impression 2 user manual Recording submasters You can create submasters in Live or Blind mode Follow these steps to record a simple pile on submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Select channels and set Creates look channel levels 3 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Sub 5 Enter The current stage look is recorded into Oros submaster 5 Press Submaster 5 s bump button Note Use Solo to record specific channels into the submaster rather than the full stage look For example 5 Thru 1 0 Solo Record Sub 5 Enter records only the current levels of channels 5 through 10 in submas ter 5 regardless of what other channel levels
318. ve To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 3 Close the console and test for proper operation 286 Impression 2 user manual Installing SMPTE In order to use SMPTE equipment with Impression 2 the SMPTE option must have been installed at the factory Connect Impression 2 to SMPTE equipment using an appropriate SMPTE cable Follow these steps to connect SMPTE equipment to Impression 2 1 Turn console power off 2 Insert SMPTE cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled SMPTE 3 Set DIP switch 4 to enable SMPTE See Older console DIP switch set tings on page 273 for instructions SMPTE console connector 3 pin female XLR Balanced SMPTE pinout 1 Common 2 Signal 3 Signal Note This pinout is for balanced input For unbalanced input make the fol lowing connections in the user cable Connect XLR pin 1 and pin 2 together tying Common to Signal The unbalanced signal connects to XLR pin 3 Signal appendix a installation 287 ETCNet Impression 2 supports ETCNet a specially designed network that allows you to connect a wide variety of ETC interface devices to the console at remote locations Through these devices you can attach monitors DMX512 devices RFUs alphanumeric keyboards and Designer s Work sheets to the network Interface devices include the Remote Interface and the Remote Video interface ETCNet connectors for twisted pair wir
319. wer speeds DMX512 Start DMX512 Start is softkey S3 in the Input Output Configuration display Use S3 DMX512 Start to set the starting dimmer number of a DMX512 port If any port is in multiplex mode the starting numbers may not be changed DMX In DMX In is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Stage and Fader displays Use S8 DMX In in Stage mode to record only the DMX512 input levels into a cue group or submaster and in Fader mode to view any DMX512 input to the console Example Record Cue 8 S8 DMX In Enter records only the current DMX512 input levels into cue 8 Example Record Cue 5 Except S8 DMX In Enter records current live levels on stage except for those set by DMX512 input into cue 5 Down Arrow Use J to move through various displays such as the Effect and Macro Editing display modes or the Stage and Blind displays Impression 2 user manual Effect Impression 2 allows you to create up to 600 effects each with up to 100 steps Effects allow you to assign channels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order You may record them as cues or submasters Each effect includes level and timing controls for the steps in the effect and overall timing controls for the effect itself Each effect can run for up to 99 59 minutes Note Current channel levels are not affected by an effect untila step runs that
320. which cues have tracking levels for that particular channel You can also use Tracksheet to add or modify a tracked channel through recorded cues To display Tracksheet press Tracksheet lf more cues are recorded than fit on one screen press S5 Next Page to display the next screen of cues Example Tracksheet Channel 5 Enter Cue 1 At 7115 Record Enter records channel 5 at 75 percent in cue 1 Type Use Type to select the fade type for a cue or the submaster type for a submaster Example Blind Cue 4 Type 3 Enter makes cue 4 an effect cue Example Blind Sub 6 Type 2 Enter makes submaster 6 inhibitive Type Level Type Level is softkey S4 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Press S4 Type Level to select between crossfade and allfade steps in a subroutine cue Press again to specify a final fade level of less than 100 Example Step 1 S4 Type Level 2 Enter sets the step as an allfade cue Example Step 3 Select Cue 8 S4 Type Level S4 Type Level 5110 will fade cue 8 to 50 percent of its recorded level Unpatch Unpatch is softkey S6 in the Patch display Use S6 Unpatch to unpatch patch to channel 0 selected dimmers Example Dimmer 5 S6 Unpatch Enter unpatches dimmer 5 Example S6 Unpatch Dimmer 7 Enter unpatches dimmer 7 Impression 2 user manual Unset Dimmer Unset Dimmer is softkey
321. with which you are working Delete unnecessary parts of the show to free up mem ory If this doesn t work you may want to break the show into two shows one for each act This message may also appear if you attempt to run too many effects System Error This software version is incompatible with the existing hardware Please reload the correct version of software or contact your service representative for further assistance The Designer s Worksheet setup and regions stored in show memory DO NOT match what is being loaded from disk To preserve current Worksheet setup press ENTER To load new Worksheet setup and regions from disk press CLEAR Press Enter to retain the layout option you previously selected on the Designer s Worksheet setup screen Existing regions have already been erased Press Clear to replace the current Designer s Worksheet layout option with the new show s layout New regions will be loaded with the new show 302 Impression 2 user manual ETCLink errors ETCLink provides advisory messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potentially terminate or dras tically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages
322. ws you to set channel levels check dimmers or run cues from remote locations in your studio or theatre The IRFU consists of two components a receiver and a transmit ter The receiver is connected to the console with a standard Multi con ductor cable The transmitter is a hand held wireless unit that sends infrared control signals to the receiving unit To install the infrared remote control unit follow these steps 1 Verify that the receiver unit is properly connected to the console and that battery in transmitter is good See infrared remote documenta tion for correct connection procedure 2 Press Setup 3 Select 6 Options Settings and press Enter 4 Select 4 Infrared Remote and press Enter 5 Enter 1 to enable the IRFU or 0 to disable the IRFU Press Enter 6 Press On key on the transmitter unit to turn power on Transmitter power automatically shuts off if no keys are pressed for three min utes IRFU console connector DIN 5 pin female IRFU pinout Ground PPM data 12V WSI data Charge current aBRWN appendix a installation 297 298 Installing remote macros The console provides eight remote macro inputs through the 25 pin con nector on the back panel labeled Remote Go A user supplied remote device connects to the console via a 24 AWG aluminum shielded multi conductor cable with one twisted pair designated for each switch Belden 9507 S R PCV Insulated or Alpha 5477 80 Deg C 300
323. xt Tracksheet allows you to display one channel s settings for all recorded cues At a glance you can see which cues have tracking levels for that particular channel You can also use Tracksheet to add or modify a tracked channel through recorded cues To display Tracksheet press Tracksheet Step by step instructions for using Tracksheet are on the following pages If more cues are recorded than fit on one screen press S5 Next Page to display the next screen of cues Display mode Keypad corner Channel display line Channel 1 Cues 1 200 Cue display 2 34 Prompt area Softkeys Keypad corner This window indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number Channel display line This line displays the current channel number and the range of cues dis played Cue display The cue display lists recorded cues and the level recorded in each Prompt area The operator prompt displays messages to guide you through Tracksheet functions 88 Impression 2 user manual Using Tracksheet With Tracksheet you can track one channel at a time through any group of cues at any level including zero Tracksheet is useful when you want to track a channel through blackout cues or when you want to complete a track that has been blocked To track a channel fo
324. y back a cue using rate override the console controls the percentage of completion but you control the rate Rate override allows you to play back a cue faster or slower than the rate at which it was recorded The rate wheel adjusts the fade rate Fade rate is expressed as a percentage A cue with a fade rate of 100 per cent plays back at its recorded fade time A fade rate of 300 plays the cue back three times faster than its recorded fade time A fade rate of 50 plays the cue back half as fast as Its recorded fade time For example if you record a cue with a 10 second fade time a rate of 200 causes it to play back in five seconds A fade rate of 50 causes it to play back in 20 sec onds You may take control of a cue s fade rate while the cue is running In addi tion you may press both Ratel keys to control rate of both fades Follow this example to place a cue in a fader under rate override Keystrokes Action 1 Press Rate key for the Activates rate control fader in which the cue is running Press both Rate keys if you wish to control both faders 2 Move rate wheel Fades are placed under control of the rate wheel Move the wheel to adjust fade rates Fader Status window shows the current rate 105 106 Quickstep Quickstep allows you to run through a show checking all cues without having to wait for fades When Quickstep is active the faders ignore all upfade downfade follow and wait times Cues snap i
325. y cue you record If you prefer you may record cues with custom fade times instead Fade times can be zero seconds to 99 59 minutes long They may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 sec onds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to record a cue with a custom fade time Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue Press 3 Press Timel 5 Press 8 Press Enter Enter Press Record 8 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 3 Prompt reads Enter upfade time Enters a fade time of 8 seconds Corner reads UpTime 8 Enters matching downfade time Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records cue 3 with fade time of eight seconds Note If the cue already exists you may omit steps 7 and 8 63 Recording a cue with split fade times Impression 2 allows you to record cues with different upfade and down fade times These cues are said to have split fade times On the Impres sion 2 display the time to the left of the refers to the upfade time the number to the right refers to the downfade time Follow these steps to record a cue with split upfade and downfade times Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blin
326. your production by loading a second show into memory Label each diskette carefully and clearly to help you keep track of what show is on the diskette You can also use the Read Show from Disk option to find out the name storage date and time of the show on any diskette Note For information on naming a show in the Setup menu see page 27 We recommend that you make two back up copies of each show on sep arate diskettes and that you keep them in different locations If your show diskette were damaged a back up diskette stored at home could save you hours of work When you select diskette options any fades in progress are stopped Therefore if you need to load an additional show in the middle of a perfor mance load it between cues when all channels are static Fader and sub master outputs are maintained as the new show loads Before you can use a diskette in Impression 2 you Must format it on the console or on an IBM PC compatible with a high density drive Formatting instructions are on the following page Storing diskettes e Store diskettes at a temperature between 50 and 140 degrees Fahr enheit e Keep diskettes away from magnets magnetized objects or heavy electrical equipment including large lighting equipment e Do not touch the magnetic disk inside the plastic diskette case e Do not eat drink or smoke when you handle diskettes Impression 2 user manual Formatting diskettes Warning Formatting a diskette eras
327. ystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Select channel number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark 3 Enter the channel number Selects the channel to park to park then press At Prompt reads Enter intensity for park channel s 4 Enter the level at which to Parks the channel at the selected level park the channel Alert appears Parked Channels Impression 2 user manual chapter 22 park Unparking channels You may unpark one or all channels at any time When a channel is unparked its level reverts instantly to whatever level the console is currently assigning it Unpark a channel To unpark a channel follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park 3 Enter the channel number to unpark and press Rel Unpark all channels Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select channel number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark Unparks the channel To unpark all parked channels follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park 3 Press Rell 4 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select channel number s then press AT to park or press RELEASE to unpark Prompt reads To release all parked channels press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Unparks all parked channels 263 Parking groups cues and submasters Groups cues and s

Cue

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents